A consolation for our grammar schooles: or, a faithfull and most comfortable incouragement, for laying of a sure foundation of all good learning in our schooles, and for prosperous building thereupon More specially for all those of the inferiour sort, and all ruder countries and places; namely, for Ireland, Wales, Virginia, with the Sommer Ilands, and for their more speedie attaining of our English tongue by the same labour, that all may speake one and the same language. ...
         Brinsley, John, fl. 1581-1624.
      
       
         
           1622
        
      
       Approx. 187 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 51 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images.
       
         Text Creation Partnership,
         Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) :
         2004-03 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1).
         A16864
         STC 3767
         ESTC S106549
         99842263
         99842263
         6904
         
           
            This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of
             Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal
            . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.
          
        
      
       
         Early English books online.
      
       
         (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A16864)
         Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 6904)
         Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1475-1640 ; 1058:9)
      
       
         
           
             A consolation for our grammar schooles: or, a faithfull and most comfortable incouragement, for laying of a sure foundation of all good learning in our schooles, and for prosperous building thereupon More specially for all those of the inferiour sort, and all ruder countries and places; namely, for Ireland, Wales, Virginia, with the Sommer Ilands, and for their more speedie attaining of our English tongue by the same labour, that all may speake one and the same language. ...
             Brinsley, John, fl. 1581-1624.
          
           [16], 84, [2] p.
           
             Printed by Richard Field for Thomas Man, dwelling in Pater noster Row, at the signe of the Talbot,
             London :
             1622.
          
           
             Dedication signed: Iohn Brinsley.
             The first leaf is blank.
             With a final imprimatur leaf.
             Reproduction of the original in the Henry E. Huntington Library and Art Gallery.
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford.
         Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors.
      
       
         EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO.
         EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org).
         The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source.
         Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data.
         Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so.
         Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor.
         The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines.
         Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements).
         
          Keying and markup guidelines are available at the
           Text Creation Partnership web site
          .
        
      
       
         
         
      
    
     
       
         eng
      
       
         
           Education, Elementary -- Great Britain -- Early works to 1800.
        
      
    
     
        2003-10 TCP
        Assigned for keying and markup
      
        2003-10 Aptara
        Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images
      
        2003-11 Rina Kor
        Sampled and proofread
      
        2003-11 Rina Kor
        Text and markup reviewed and edited
      
        2003-12 pfs
        Batch review (QC) and XML conversion
      
    
  
   
     
       
         
         
         
           A
           CONSOLATION
           FOR
           OVR
           GRAMMAR
           SCHOOLES
           :
           OR
           ,
           A
           faithfull
           and
           most
           comfortable
           
             incouragement
             ,
             for
             laying
             of
             a
             sure
             foundation
          
           of
           all
           good
           Learning
           in
           our
           Schooles
           ,
           and
           
             for
             prosperous
             building
             thereupon
          
           .
        
         
           
             More
             specially
             for
             all
             those
             of
             the
             inferiour
          
           sort
           ,
           and
           all
           ruder
           countries
           and
           places
           ;
           namely
           ,
           for
           
             Ireland
             ,
             Wales
             ,
             Virginia
          
           ,
           with
           the
           Sommer
           Ilands
           ,
           and
           for
           their
           more
           speedie
           attaining
           of
           our
           
             English
             tongue
             by
             the
             same
             labour
             ,
             that
             all
          
           may
           speake
           one
           and
           the
           same
           Language
           .
        
         
           And
           withall
           ,
           for
           the
           helping
           of
           all
           such
           as
           are
           
             d●sirous
             speedilie
             to
             recouer
             that
             which
             they
             had
             formerlie
          
           got
           in
           the
           Grammar
           Schooles
           ;
           and
           to
           proceed
           aright
           
             therein
             ,
             for
             the
             perpetuall
             benefit
             of
             these
             our
          
           Nations
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           Churches
           
             of
             Christ.
          
           
        
         
           LONDON
           ,
           Printed
           by
           RICHARD
           FIELD
           for
           THOMAS
           MAN
           ▪
           
             dwelling
             in
             Pater
             noster
             Row
             ,
             at
             the
             Signe
          
           of
           the
           Talbot
           .
           1622.
           
        
      
       
         
         
         
           ¶
           To
           the
           Right
           Honourable
           his
           Maiesties
           Lord
           Deputy
           of
           Ireland
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           right
           Honourable
           the
           Lord
           President
           and
           Lord
           Lieutenant
           of
           WALES
           ,
           and
           the
           Principalitie
           thereof
           ,
           the
           Gouernours
           of
           the
           Iles
           of
           GERNSEY
           and
           IERNSEY
           ;
           and
           to
           the
           right
           Honourable
           and
           right
           Worshipfull
           ,
           the
           Treasurer
           ,
           Councell
           and
           Company
           for
           VIRGINIA
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           Sommer
           Ilands
           ;
           and
           to
           all
           other
           Gouernours
           within
           his
           Maiesties
           dominions
           ,
           to
           whom
           the
           charge
           and
           care
           of
           Schooles
           ;
           namely
           ,
           those
           of
           the
           inferiour
           sort
           ,
           are
           assigned
           :
           with
           all
           true
           fauourers
           of
           good
           Learning
           ,
           who
           vnfainedly
           wish
           the
           perpetuall
           flourishing
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           of
           their
           natiue
           Countrey
           ,
           I.
           B.
           wisheth
           all
           happinesse
           in
           Christ
           eternally
           .
        
         
           AFter
           many
           thoughts
           to
           whom
           I
           should
           more
           particularly
           dedicate
           this
           my
           hoped
           Consolation
           ,
           (
           right
           Honourable
           able
           and
           right
           Worshipfull
           ,
           )
           the
           Lord
           in
           his
           wisedome
           and
           mercie
           (
           I
           trust
           )
           directed
           me
           vnto
           your selues
           ,
           as
           those
           whom
           it
           doth
           in
           a
           peculiar
           manner
           concerne
           .
           That
           like
           as
           he
           hath
           appointed
           you
           
           to
           these
           places
           ,
           so
           ye
           may
           euer
           haue
           before
           your
           eies
           ,
           the
           speciall
           ends
           for
           which
           he
           hath
           assigned
           them
           to
           your
           trust
           ,
           &
           for
           which
           you
           must
           be
           answerable
           to
           his
           heauenly
           Maiesty
           .
           The
           first
           and
           chiefe
           whereof
           (
           as
           I
           conceiue
           )
           is
           this
           ,
           That
           his
           pure
           religion
           ,
           honour
           ,
           and
           true
           worship
           ,
           may
           be
           set
           vp
           ,
           and
           aduaunced
           in
           them
           ;
           the
           next
           ,
           that
           the
           wealth
           and
           sauing
           of
           all
           his
           poore
           people
           in
           those
           places
           ,
           both
           of
           their
           soules
           and
           bodies
           ,
           may
           be
           by
           you
           procured
           ,
           so
           farre
           as
           in
           your
           power
           shall
           lie
           .
           And
           these
           things
           to
           be
           effected
           principally
           ,
           by
           a
           learned
           ,
           holie
           ,
           and
           faithfull
           Ministerie
           ,
           protected
           and
           assisted
           by
           a
           godlie
           Magistracie
           ,
           and
           by
           propagating
           and
           spreading
           all
           good
           learning
           and
           knowledge
           amongst
           them
           .
           To
           this
           purpose
           God
           hauing
           ordained
           schooles
           of
           learning
           to
           be
           a
           principall
           meanes
           to
           reduce
           a
           barbarous
           people
           to
           ciuilitie
           ,
           and
           thereby
           to
           prepare
           them
           the
           better
           to
           receiue
           the
           glorious
           Gospel
           of
           Iesus
           Christ
           ;
           as
           also
           for
           the
           breeding
           and
           nourishing
           of
           such
           a
           holie
           Ministerie
           ,
           with
           a
           wife
           and
           godlie
           Magistracie
           ,
           and
           people
           to
           be
           perpetuallie
           preserued
           ;
           your
           care
           as
           I
           take
           it
           ,
           in
           the
           next
           place
           (
           that
           I
           may
           speak
           with
           all
           reuerence
           and
           submission
           )
           ought
           to
           be
           for
           prouision
           of
           meete
           schooles
           and
           Seminaries
           for
           them
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           natures
           and
           conditions
           of
           the
           places
           ,
           and
           as
           God
           shall
           raise
           vp
           meanes
           thereto
           .
           And
           for
           those
           which
           are
           alreadie
           so
           prouided
           and
           established
           ,
           
           that
           the
           best
           orders
           may
           be
           knowne
           and
           receiued
           ,
           for
           the
           speediest
           aduancement
           of
           the
           best
           learning
           in
           them
           ,
           and
           for
           accomplishing
           all
           the
           good
           thereby
           desired
           ;
           and
           withall
           for
           supply
           of
           what
           priuate
           helpes
           Gods
           goodnes
           shall
           vouchsafe
           ,
           for
           breeding
           ,
           and
           nourishing
           ,
           and
           also
           preseruing
           all
           true
           pietie
           and
           grace
           amongst
           them
           .
        
         
           The
           benefit
           therefore
           and
           comfort
           of
           such
           small
           mites
           ,
           as
           his
           heauenlie
           bountie
           hath
           vouchsafed
           me
           ,
           which
           may
           be
           helpefull
           hereunto
           ,
           I
           do
           most
           thankefully
           and
           cheerefully
           ,
           as
           from
           his
           goodnesse
           ,
           tender
           vnto
           you
           to
           this
           end
           ;
           And
           more
           specially
           to
           you
           ,
           right
           Honour
           able
           and
           right
           Worshipfull
           the
           Gouernour
           ,
           Councell
           and
           Companie
           for
           Virginia
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           
             Sommer
             Ilands
          
           ;
           that
           planting
           in
           a
           right
           order
           ,
           beginning
           with
           the
           Lord
           ,
           and
           the
           carefull
           planting
           and
           watering
           of
           his
           sacred
           Religion
           ,
           you
           may
           finde
           a
           more
           happie
           growth
           ,
           and
           increase
           ,
           and
           euermore
           sound
           and
           lasting
           ioy
           to
           your
           owne
           soules
           .
           First
           ,
           the
           mite
           of
           my
           Schoole-labours
           trauelled
           in
           ,
           now
           manie
           yeares
           for
           all
           inferiour
           and
           ruder
           places
           ,
           whereunto
           what
           blessing
           his
           heauenlie
           bountie
           hath
           giuen
           ,
           I
           leaue
           to
           the
           iudgement
           of
           all
           true
           harted
           wel-willers
           vnto
           good
           learning
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           I
           desire
           to
           commend
           vnto
           you
           ,
           for
           them
           ,
           and
           that
           vpon
           vndoubted
           experience
           ,
           the
           helpe
           ,
           and
           benefit
           of
           another
           poore
           labour
           ,
           
           which
           he
           of
           his
           goodnes
           hath
           likewise
           granted
           vnto
           me
           ,
           namelie
           of
           a
           little
           Treatise
           called
           ,
           
             The
             true
             Watch
             ,
             and
             Rule
             of
             Life
             :
          
           which
           hauing
           receiued
           the
           witnesse
           of
           sundrie
           godlie
           learned
           ,
           (
           of
           whom
           I
           haue
           for
           manie
           yeares
           intreated
           the
           examining
           ;
           and
           censuring
           of
           it
           ,
           after
           the
           publique
           authorizing
           thereof
           )
           to
           be
           that
           waie
           of
           godlines
           ,
           wherein
           we
           all
           who
           truelie
           professe
           Christs
           Gospel
           do
           agree
           ,
           and
           that
           narrow
           path
           ,
           in
           which
           all
           that
           walke
           conscionablie
           ,
           and
           carefullie
           ,
           shall
           certainely
           finde
           eternall
           Life
           :
           I
           dare
           be
           the
           more
           bold
           in
           ●●tie
           to
           make
           tender
           of
           ,
           for
           the
           furtherance
           of
           their
           perpetuall
           comfort
           and
           felicitie
           .
           And
           vnto
           the
           same
           adioyned
           the
           
             Rule
             of
             true
             Prayer
          
           ,
           the
           second
           part
           of
           the
           same
           
             True
             Watch
          
           ;
           wherein
           I
           haue
           followed
           ,
           (
           so
           neare
           as
           I
           haue
           beene
           able
           )
           the
           perfect
           patterne
           of
           our
           blessed
           Sauiour
           :
           which
           two
           so
           conioyned
           ,
           may
           be
           for
           directing
           priuately
           euerie
           soule
           (
           which
           hath
           grace
           to
           vse
           them
           ,
           and
           to
           put
           them
           so
           in
           practise
           )
           as
           their
           Sea-card
           and
           Compasse
           ,
           to
           keepe
           them
           in
           the
           right
           course
           to
           their
           intended
           Point
           ;
           that
           they
           may
           not
           be
           carried
           ouer
           farre
           ,
           nor
           fall
           too
           short
           of
           their
           desired
           hauen
           ;
           Yea
           to
           performe
           that
           for
           them
           ,
           which
           neither
           Card
           nor
           Compasse
           can
           ;
           to
           wit
           ,
           that
           they
           may
           not
           onelie
           be
           k●pt
           from
           splitting
           ;
           or
           dashing
           vpon
           the
           Rockes
           or
           Sands
           ,
           but
           that
           they
           may
           saile
           securelie
           amongst
           the
           most
           
           dangerous
           rockes
           and
           perillous
           tempests
           .
           That
           arriuing
           happily
           ,
           they
           may
           likewise
           euer
           after
           be
           kep●
           safe
           ,
           in
           the
           midst
           of
           all
           sauage
           and
           cruell
           enemies
           .
        
         
           And
           finally
           ,
           what
           straits
           or
           miseries
           soeuer
           they
           shall
           come
           into
           ,
           either
           by
           Sea
           or
           land
           ;
           that
           but
           onely
           crying
           vnto
           the
           Lord
           ,
           they
           may
           be
           graciously
           heard
           ;
           and
           mercifully
           deliuered
           in
           due
           time
           ,
           according
           to
           that
           which
           shal
           be
           most
           for
           the
           glorie
           of
           his
           Maiestie
           and
           their
           owne
           saluation
           ,
           with
           the
           good
           of
           his
           people
           .
        
         
           Though
           the
           dedication
           and
           patronage
           of
           my
           Schoole-labours
           belong
           vnto
           our
           most
           hopefull
           and
           illustrious
           Prince
           ,
           and
           so
           in
           like
           maner
           of
           my
           Watch
           vnto
           most
           Honourable
           personages
           (
           to
           whom
           I
           am
           euer
           bound
           )
           yet
           I
           know
           that
           the
           tender
           of
           the
           assured
           benefit
           thereof
           ,
           after
           so
           long
           triall
           in
           the
           right
           vse
           and
           practise
           of
           them
           ,
           euen
           vnto
           your
           Honours
           and
           Worships
           ,
           for
           these
           poore
           soules
           ,
           and
           for
           your
           more
           happie
           execution
           of
           your
           charge
           ,
           will
           be
           most
           pleasing
           vnto
           them
           ,
           as
           who
           desire
           the
           wealth
           of
           all
           .
           Yea
           (
           giue
           me
           leaue
           to
           speake
           iointlie
           and
           freelie
           ,
           yet
           in
           all
           humble
           duty
           vnto
           you
           all
           before
           mentioned
           ,
           both
           right
           Honourable
           and
           right
           Worshipfull
           )
           euen
           yee
           are
           they
           to
           whom
           the
           charge
           of
           these
           poore
           Countries
           and
           places
           are
           committed
           in
           speciall
           manner
           ,
           and
           the
           prouiding
           for
           them
           .
           If
           therefore
           you
           should
           not
           vse
           all
           holie
           meanes
           for
           the
           honour
           of
           our
           God
           ,
           with
           the
           
           sauing
           and
           preseruing
           of
           all
           those
           soules
           ,
           and
           their
           posteritie
           ,
           and
           gaining
           the
           verie
           sauage
           amongst
           them
           vnto
           Iesus
           Christ
           ,
           whether
           Irish
           or
           Indian
           ,
           but
           onelie
           respect
           your
           owne
           ends
           and
           proiects
           ,
           you
           could
           neuer
           stand
           before
           his
           heauenlie
           Maiestie
           ,
           to
           answere
           his
           Highnesse
           for
           it
           ;
           especiallie
           ,
           if
           hee
           most
           graciouslie
           offering
           you
           helpes
           thereto
           ,
           you
           should
           not
           embrace
           them
           accordinglie
           ,
           and
           to
           your
           vtmost
           abilitie
           see
           them
           put
           in
           execution
           .
           You
           cannot
           be
           ignorant
           of
           the
           wofull
           estate
           of
           all
           sorts
           ,
           so
           long
           as
           they
           remaine
           in
           ignorance
           and
           blindnesse
           ,
           without
           the
           sauing
           knowledge
           of
           our
           Lord
           Iesus
           Christ
           ,
           and
           much
           more
           of
           all
           such
           ,
           as
           haue
           bene
           nourished
           long
           in
           fearefull
           superstition
           and
           Idolatrie
           :
           and
           aboue
           all
           other
           ,
           those
           who
           haue
           bene
           bred
           in
           a
           manifest
           ,
           and
           most
           palpable
           ,
           and
           euen
           a
           visible
           adoring
           of
           Sathan
           ;
           nor
           ,
           how
           the
           Holie
           Ghost
           hath
           told
           vs
           plainelie
           ,
           
           
             That
             our
             Lord
             Iesus
             will
             come
             ,
             in
             flaming
             fire
             to
             render
             vengeance
             to
             all
             who
             know
             not
             God
             ,
             and
             which
             obey
             not
             his
             heauenly
             Gospell
             .
          
           Who
           must
           then
           be
           punished
           with
           euerlasting
           perdition
           ,
           when
           he
           shall
           come
           to
           be
           glorified
           in
           his
           Saints
           ,
           and
           to
           be
           made
           maruellous
           in
           all
           them
           that
           beleeue
           .
           Oh
           set
           before
           your
           faces
           the
           miserable
           condition
           of
           the
           damned
           ,
           and
           so
           the
           danger
           of
           all
           liuing
           in
           blindnesse
           ,
           whilst
           they
           so
           remaine
           .
           If
           we
           beleeue
           the
           word
           of
           the
           Lord
           ,
           
           and
           looke
           stedfastlie
           with
           the
           eies
           of
           Faith
           ,
           vpon
           the
           wretched
           estate
           and
           wofull
           torment
           of
           that
           rich
           Glutton
           in
           Hell
           (
           by
           whom
           our
           Sauiour
           fore-warneth
           all
           sorts
           for
           euer
           )
           it
           will
           surely
           cause
           vs
           to
           looke
           vnto
           our selues
           .
           
           Or
           if
           we
           set
           before
           our
           eies
           the
           Lake
           prepared
           for
           all
           the
           vngodlie
           ,
           
           and
           where
           the
           bloud
           of
           those
           soules
           must
           be
           required
           ,
           if
           they
           perish
           for
           lacke
           of
           warning
           or
           instruction
           .
           And
           finallie
           ,
           if
           we
           consider
           aright
           ,
           
             That
             the
             righteous
             can
             scarcely
             be
             saued
             ,
          
           
           as
           the
           Holie
           Ghost
           witnesseth
           most
           plainelie
           ,
           and
           we
           may
           see
           it
           by
           d●ilie
           experience
           ,
           (
           when
           as
           m●nie
           a
           good
           soule
           ,
           which
           hath
           bene
           carefull
           to
           walke
           with
           God
           ,
           yet
           in
           distresse
           of
           conscience
           ,
           and
           a
           little
           left
           to
           Sathans
           buffe●tings
           ,
           for
           their
           humbling
           ,
           endure
           such
           miserie
           ,
           and
           is
           so
           hardly
           rescued
           from
           him
           and
           from
           vtter
           destruction
           )
           it
           will
           surely
           awake
           vs
           all
           to
           looke
           more
           carefully
           to
           all
           committed
           to
           our
           charges
           .
           Yee
           are
           those
           whom
           our
           blessed
           God
           hath
           appointed
           ;
           vnder
           our
           dread
           and
           gracious
           Soueraigne
           to
           be
           as
           foster-fathers
           vnto
           them
           ,
           and
           therefore
           it
           concernes
           you
           neerelie
           ,
           to
           thinke
           seriouslie
           hereof
           ;
           for
           if
           that
           way
           of
           godlinesse
           ,
           which
           we
           professe
           according
           to
           the
           word
           of
           the
           Lord
           and
           our
           good
           Lawes
           (
           which
           I
           haue
           long
           endeuoured
           to
           set
           plainely
           before
           ,
           our
           faces
           ,
           in
           that
           little
           Tr●atise
           ,
           the
           vse
           and
           benefit
           whereof
           I
           desire
           to
           commend
           vnto
           you
           for
           them
           )
           be
           
           that
           narrow
           way
           of
           life
           ,
           as
           wee
           are
           assured
           from
           the
           mouth
           of
           the
           Lord
           it
           is
           ;
           then
           their
           contrary
           courses
           must
           needes
           be
           the
           way
           of
           death
           and
           hell
           .
           Though
           therefore
           ,
           wee
           should
           haue
           no
           commiseration
           of
           the
           poore
           soules
           themselues
           ,
           yet
           remember
           the
           things
           that
           may
           concerne
           your
           owne
           blessed
           estate
           and
           posteritie
           ,
           and
           your
           ioyfull
           appearing
           before
           the
           high
           Tribunall
           of
           our
           Lord
           and
           Sauiour
           ,
           and
           then
           there
           will
           be
           no
           more
           need
           to
           mooue
           you
           therein
           ,
           nor
           anie
           other
           whom
           the
           charge
           of
           soules
           concernes
           ,
           who
           shall
           consider
           hereof
           aright
           ,
           to
           do
           your
           vtmost
           endeuour
           for
           their
           saluation
           .
           There
           will
           be
           no
           more
           need
           to
           call
           on
           you
           to
           see
           the
           gospel
           of
           Christ
           planted
           among
           them
           ,
           or
           to
           prouide
           them
           of
           faithfull
           Ministers
           ,
           and
           to
           procure
           by
           all
           possible
           meanes
           all
           other
           helps
           ,
           or
           that
           ,
           that
           which
           hath
           bene
           most
           charitablie
           giuen
           ,
           and
           formerlie
           collected
           to
           these
           ends
           ,
           may
           be
           rightlie
           employed
           ,
           and
           whatsoeuer
           else
           the
           Lord
           shall
           hereafter
           affoord
           for
           their
           benefit
           ,
           chieflie
           to
           bring
           them
           into
           and
           keep
           them
           in
           this
           narrow
           path
           .
           Wofull
           is
           the
           case
           of
           all
           those
           ,
           amongst
           whom
           Sathan
           reignes
           ,
           and
           who
           worship
           him
           instead
           of
           Christ
           ,
           as
           all
           such
           do
           ,
           who
           know
           him
           not
           ,
           and
           much
           more
           those
           poore
           Indians
           ,
           among
           whom
           he
           (
           as
           is
           reported
           )
           is
           visibly
           adored
           &
           sacrificed
           vnto
           ,
           as
           their
           God.
           Maruell
           not
           if
           honest
           and
           vnderstanding
           Christians
           be
           so
           hardly
           drawne
           ouer
           
           to
           these
           places
           ,
           as
           namely
           into
           Virginia
           ,
           or
           so
           much
           as
           to
           perswade
           their
           friends
           to
           such
           a
           voyage
           ,
           when
           as
           there
           are
           in
           the
           same
           so
           manifold
           perils
           ,
           and
           especially
           of
           falling
           away
           from
           God
           to
           Sathan
           ,
           and
           that
           themselues
           ,
           or
           their
           posterity
           should
           become
           vtterly
           sauage
           ,
           as
           they
           are
           .
           This
           holy
           care
           being
           first
           had
           ,
           for
           their
           soules
           and
           eternall
           happinesse
           ;
           and
           withall
           ,
           that
           there
           be
           no
           wrong
           offered
           to
           the
           poore
           sauage
           there
           ,
           nor
           scand
           all
           giuen
           to
           them
           ,
           there
           may
           be
           a
           greater
           hope
           of
           a
           happy
           Plantation
           ,
           and
           that
           he
           will
           in
           mercy
           afford
           a
           plentifull
           supply
           of
           all
           good
           things
           ,
           and
           raise
           vp
           many
           to
           be
           benefactors
           and
           furtherers
           ,
           and
           giue
           a
           prosperous
           successe
           to
           all
           your
           holy
           endeuours
           ,
           with
           assurance
           of
           his
           fauour
           present
           ,
           and
           for
           euermore
           .
           But
           if
           thorough
           the
           wickednes
           or
           offensiue
           carriage
           ef
           Ministers
           or
           people
           ,
           minding
           nothing
           but
           for
           their
           owne
           aduantage
           ,
           these
           poore
           soules
           shall
           take
           occasion
           to
           conceiue
           euill
           of
           the
           Lord
           ,
           and
           his
           religion
           ,
           all
           this
           hope
           is
           vtterly
           ouerthrowne
           ,
           in
           the
           very
           hauen
           .
        
         
           Here
           upon
           in
           my
           desire
           of
           their
           conuersion
           and
           saluation
           ,
           with
           the
           sauing
           and
           preseruation
           of
           our
           owne
           countrie-men
           there
           alreadie
           ,
           and
           which
           hereafter
           shall
           go
           to
           them
           ,
           and
           of
           all
           other
           in
           these
           ruder
           countries
           and
           places
           ,
           I
           haue
           bene
           bold
           to
           tender
           these
           my
           poore
           trauels
           ,
           vpon
           much
           hope
           and
           confidence
           :
           That
           
           first
           euen
           this
           course
           of
           instruction
           ,
           to
           be
           presented
           vnto
           you
           ,
           being
           embraced
           and
           rightly
           put
           in
           practise
           ,
           a
           most
           speedy
           and
           sure
           foundation
           ,
           may
           be
           layd
           for
           all
           future
           good
           learning
           ,
           in
           their
           schooles
           ,
           without
           any
           difference
           at
           all
           from
           our
           courses
           receiued
           here
           at
           home
           ;
           and
           whereby
           both
           Maisters
           and
           Scholars
           ,
           may
           proceed
           speedily
           ,
           and
           cheerefully
           ,
           and
           with
           certaine
           assurance
           of
           a
           blessing
           ;
           and
           that
           so
           from
           vs
           may
           be
           sent
           continu●ll
           supplies
           of
           teachers
           to
           proceed
           in
           the
           same
           order
           .
           The
           triall
           whereof
           I
           dare
           (
           through
           Gods
           goodnesse
           )
           tender
           to
           any
           by
           your
           selu●s
           appointed
           to
           m●ke
           full
           demonstration
           of
           it
           to
           them
           ,
           like
           as
           I
           haue
           formerly
           done
           to
           the
           most
           learned
           and
           fit
           that
           I
           could
           chuse
           to
           this
           purpose
           ,
           as
           appeareth
           in
           the
           Examiners
           ce●sure
           ,
           in
           the
           closing
           vp
           of
           this
           little
           Treatise
           .
           And
           withal
           ,
           to
           help
           that
           we
           may
           haue
           by
           the
           same
           ,
           not
           onely
           the
           puritie
           of
           our
           owne
           language
           preserued
           amongst
           all
           our
           owne
           people
           th●re
           ,
           but
           also
           that
           it
           may
           be
           readily
           learned
           in
           the
           Schooles
           ,
           together
           with
           the
           Latin
           ,
           and
           other
           tongues
           ,
           and
           so
           more
           propagated
           to
           the
           rudest
           Welch
           and
           Irish
           ,
           yea
           to
           the
           very
           heathen
           &
           sauage
           ,
           brought
           vp
           amongst
           them
           ,
           the
           more
           easily
           thereby
           to
           reduce
           them
           all
           (
           as
           was
           said
           )
           to
           a
           louing
           ciuility
           ,
           with
           loyall
           and
           faithfull
           obedience
           to
           our
           Soueraigne
           ,
           and
           good
           Lawes
           ,
           and
           to
           prepare
           a
           way
           to
           pull
           them
           from
           the
           power
           and
           seruice
           of
           Sathan
           ,
           that
           
           they
           may
           ioyntly
           submit
           themselues
           to
           Iesus
           Christ.
           
        
         
           And
           for
           the
           Watch
           ,
           being
           agreeable
           to
           the
           word
           of
           the
           Lord
           ,
           as
           I
           trust
           euery
           one
           that
           tries
           aright
           shal
           find
           it
           ,
           I
           dare
           boldly
           a
           vow
           ,
           that
           euery
           soule
           that
           shall
           truely
           put
           in
           practise
           ,
           first
           that
           
             Rule
             and
             Way
             of
             life
          
           to
           walke
           in
           it
           ,
           shall
           find
           more
           true
           comfort
           by
           it
           ,
           then
           by
           all
           the
           commodities
           in
           Virginia
           ,
           yea
           more
           true
           ioy
           ,
           with
           all
           heauenly
           riches
           and
           felicity
           ,
           then
           all
           the
           golden
           mines
           of
           the
           Indians
           can
           possibly
           promise
           vnto
           them
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           for
           that
           
             Rule
             of
             Praier
          
           in
           the
           same
           ,
           that
           euery
           one
           who
           shall
           learne
           to
           exercise
           it
           ,
           as
           the
           Lord
           Iesus
           hath
           taught
           him
           ,
           shall
           obtaine
           whatsoeuer
           good
           thing
           his
           soule
           shall
           desire
           :
           and
           finally
           ,
           that
           so
           watching
           and
           praying
           ,
           he
           shall
           be
           kept
           safe
           ,
           euen
           in
           the
           midst
           of
           Diuels
           and
           ten
           thousand
           other
           perils
           ,
           and
           haue
           the
           Lord
           to
           be
           vnto
           him
           ,
           as
           he
           was
           to
           Abraham
           ,
           God
           all-sufficient
           ,
           whither
           soeuer
           he
           calleth
           him
           ,
           to
           be
           seene
           of
           him
           in
           the
           Mount
           ,
           and
           the
           inheritance
           of
           Abraham
           ,
           to
           him
           and
           his
           ,
           so
           walking
           ,
           for
           an
           euer
           lasting
           possession
           .
        
         
           Thus
           haue
           I
           presumed
           to
           tender
           vnto
           you
           (
           right
           Honourable
           and
           right
           Worshipfull
           )
           whatsoeuer
           the
           Lord
           hath
           vouchsafed
           me
           ,
           whereof
           I
           haue
           had
           hope
           ,
           that
           it
           might
           help
           you
           in
           your
           gouernments
           and
           charges
           ,
           for
           the
           good
           of
           those
           poore
           people
           committed
           to
           you
           ,
           and
           specially
           which
           might
           further
           the
           happy
           successe
           
           of
           that
           so
           much
           desired
           Plantation
           ,
           for
           the
           conuersion
           of
           the
           heathen
           ,
           and
           training
           them
           vp
           in
           good
           learning
           ,
           and
           the
           feare
           of
           the
           Lord
           ,
           and
           that
           so
           from
           the
           children
           ,
           it
           may
           please
           God
           more
           easily
           to
           deriue
           the
           same
           vnto
           their
           fathers
           ,
           from
           the
           younger
           to
           the
           ancients
           ;
           and
           so
           in
           time
           ,
           by
           some
           of
           themselues
           so
           trained
           vp
           ,
           to
           propagate
           it
           to
           all
           their
           posterity
           :
           which
           (
           if
           after
           further
           triall
           made
           by
           you
           )
           it
           shal
           be
           as
           curteously
           accepted
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           heartily
           and
           cheerefully
           offered
           ,
           according
           to
           that
           which
           I
           haue
           receiued
           from
           the
           Lord
           ,
           I
           shall
           not
           onely
           haue
           more
           cause
           to
           blesse
           his
           heauenly
           Maiestie
           ,
           but
           also
           be
           encouraged
           still
           to
           prosecute
           these
           poore
           trauels
           ,
           and
           to
           study
           the
           further
           good
           of
           them
           all
           during
           life
           ,
           especially
           for
           drawing
           the
           poore
           natiues
           in
           Virginia
           ,
           and
           all
           other
           of
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           rude
           and
           barbarous
           from
           Sathan
           to
           God
           ,
           and
           so
           rest
           ,
        
         
           
             Yours
             in
             all
             humble
             obseruance
             and
             hearty
             prayer
             to
             God
             for
             you
             ,
             IOHN
             BRINSLEY
             .
          
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
           A
           CONSOLATION
           FOR
           OVR
           GRAMMAR
           SCHOOLES
           .
        
         
           THE
           vncomfortable
           and
           fruitlesse
           toyles
           ,
           
           which
           the
           Lord
           hath
           left
           vnto
           men
           ,
           to
           humble
           them
           thereby
           ,
           haue
           euer
           caused
           many
           to
           bēd
           their
           wits
           and
           beate
           their
           braines
           ,
           to
           find
           out
           more
           plaine
           and
           profitable
           wayes
           ,
           both
           to
           rel●eue
           themselues
           ,
           and
           to
           make
           their
           burdens
           more
           light
           .
           Amongst
           others
           ,
           my selfe
           hauing
           first
           had
           long
           experience
           of
           the
           manifold
           euils
           which
           grow
           from
           the
           ignorance
           of
           a
           right
           order
           of
           teaching
           ,
           and
           afterwards
           some
           gracious
           tast
           of
           the
           sweetnesse
           that
           is
           to
           be
           found
           in
           the
           better
           courses
           truly
           knowne
           and
           practised
           ,
           I
           haue
           betaken
           me
           almost
           wholly
           ,
           for
           manie
           yeares
           ,
           vnto
           this
           weightie
           worke
           ,
           and
           that
           not
           without
           much
           comfort
           ,
           through
           the
           goodnesse
           of
           our
           blessed
           God.
           And
           thence
           the
           more
           earnestly
           haue
           I
           pursued
           this
           same
           ,
           for
           that
           I
           haue
           bene
           fully
           perswaded
           vpon
           happie
           experience
           (
           I
           trust
           )
           that
           I
           could
           neuer
           employ
           my
           thoughts
           and
           trauels
           more
           acceptably
           in
           anie
           earthly
           thing
           ,
           or
           whereby
           a
           greater
           benefite
           might
           redound
           both
           to
           Church
           and
           Commonwealth
           ,
           and
           in
           some
           sort
           to
           euery
           soule
           ,
           then
           in
           searching
           out
           ,
           and
           setting
           forth
           to
           the
           view
           of
           all
           ,
           the
           shortest
           ,
           surest
           ,
           and
           most
           easie
           entrance
           to
           all
           good
           learning
           ,
           and
           how
           with
           certaine
           hope
           of
           good
           successe
           all
           may
           proceed
           therein
           .
        
         
           Who
           knowes
           not
           the
           grieuous
           complaints
           ,
           which
           
           (
           to
           the
           disgrace
           of
           learning
           )
           are
           made
           almost
           in
           euerie
           place
           ,
           
           for
           the
           iniuries
           done
           to
           countries
           ,
           townes
           ,
           parents
           and
           children
           ;
           because
           in
           so
           manie
           schooles
           ,
           the
           children
           ,
           which
           are
           the
           chiefe
           hope
           of
           parents
           and
           posteritie
           ,
           are
           either
           spoiled
           altogether
           ,
           or
           else
           do
           profite
           so
           verie
           litle
           ?
           
           And
           for
           the
           most
           part
           ,
           wherein
           any
           good
           is
           done
           ,
           that
           it
           is
           ordinarily
           effected
           by
           the
           endlesse
           vexation
           of
           the
           painfull
           Maisters
           ,
           the
           extreme
           labour
           and
           ●errour
           of
           the
           poore
           scholars
           ,
           with
           enduring
           far
           ouermuch
           and
           long
           seueritie
           .
           Now
           whence
           proceedeth
           all
           this
           ,
           but
           because
           so
           few
           of
           those
           who
           vndertake
           this
           function
           ,
           
           are
           acquainted
           with
           anie
           good
           method
           ,
           or
           right
           order
           of
           instruction
           ,
           fit
           for
           a
           Grammer
           schoole
           ?
           This
           therefore
           hath
           bene
           in
           my
           heart
           ,
           to
           shew
           my
           loue
           and
           dutie
           to
           all
           sorts
           ,
           in
           seeking
           for
           my
           part
           to
           deliuer
           the
           poore
           ,
           painfull
           &
           honest
           minded
           Schoolemaister
           from
           this
           reproch
           and
           griefe
           ,
           
           and
           to
           helpe
           withall
           to
           supply
           this
           so
           great
           a
           want
           .
           And
           in
           stead
           hereof
           my
           earnest
           desire
           hath
           bene
           to
           procure
           a
           perpetuall
           benefite
           to
           all
           estates
           and
           degrees
           ,
           
           euen
           to
           euery
           man
           for
           his
           children
           and
           posteritie
           ;
           by
           endeuoring
           to
           make
           the
           path
           to
           all
           good
           learning
           more
           euen
           and
           pleasing
           in
           the
           first
           entrance
           ,
           then
           former
           ages
           haue
           knowne
           ;
           and
           thereby
           also
           in
           the
           continuall
           proceeding
           afterwards
           ,
           so
           farre
           as
           the
           Lord
           shall
           vouchsafe
           me
           his
           mercifull
           assistance
           in
           this
           great
           attempt
           .
           That
           children
           being
           so
           entred
           in
           a
           plaine
           manner
           ,
           may
           striue
           towards
           the
           goale
           with
           vndoubted
           certaintie
           of
           obtaining
           their
           desire
           ,
           with
           pleasant
           delight
           and
           chearefulnesse
           throughout
           all
           their
           time
           .
        
         
           Concerning
           the
           singular
           benefits
           and
           blessings
           which
           come
           by
           good
           learning
           ,
           
           like
           as
           to
           euery
           particular
           soule
           ,
           and
           so
           to
           whole
           nations
           ,
           no
           man
           truly
           wise
           did
           euer
           yet
           make
           doubt
           .
           No
           not
           anie
           one
           who
           hath
           knowne
           aright
           
           what
           learning
           meant
           ;
           or
           who
           vnfainedly
           loued
           his
           coūtrey
           ,
           the
           soules
           of
           Gods
           people
           ,
           or
           the
           Gospel
           of
           Christ.
           For
           what
           maketh
           a
           nation
           to
           be
           a
           glorious
           nation
           ,
           but
           that
           the
           people
           are
           a
           wise
           and
           an
           vnderstanding
           people
           ?
           What
           is
           it
           whereby
           we
           come
           so
           neare
           vnto
           the
           Highest
           ,
           or
           to
           that
           blessed
           estate
           from
           which
           by
           our
           first
           parents
           we
           are
           so
           fallen
           ,
           and
           to
           which
           we
           must
           be
           renewed
           and
           restored
           ,
           if
           euer
           we
           shall
           inherit
           againe
           the
           tree
           of
           life
           ,
           as
           by
           true
           vnderstanding
           and
           knowledge
           ,
           especially
           if
           the
           same
           be
           sanctified
           vnto
           vs
           ?
           Yea
           ,
           what
           is
           it
           else
           whereby
           we
           excell
           the
           beastes
           ,
           but
           by
           this
           diuine
           reason
           ,
           with
           which
           the
           more
           we
           are
           enlightened
           by
           the
           spirit
           of
           the
           Lord
           ,
           through
           the
           meanes
           of
           learning
           ,
           the
           more
           we
           differ
           ,
           the
           more
           we
           do
           excell
           ?
           Or
           who
           is
           he
           that
           can
           giue
           God
           that
           glorie
           for
           which
           he
           was
           created
           ,
           and
           redeemed
           from
           hell
           ,
           or
           can
           in
           anie
           measure
           honour
           him
           as
           he
           ought
           to
           do
           ,
           to
           his
           owne
           saluation
           ,
           but
           onely
           he
           who
           is
           endued
           with
           right
           knowledge
           and
           vnderstanding
           ?
           Contrarily
           ,
           whence
           is
           that
           inhumanitie
           ,
           as
           amongst
           manie
           of
           the
           Irish
           ,
           the
           Virgineans
           ,
           and
           all
           other
           barbarous
           nations
           ,
           but
           frō
           their
           extreme
           ignorance
           of
           our
           holy
           God
           ,
           and
           of
           all
           true
           and
           good
           learning
           ?
        
         
           If
           anie
           man
           should
           dislike
           of
           learning
           ,
           
           or
           thinke
           that
           there
           is
           ouer-much
           of
           it
           ,
           for
           the
           strange
           licentiousnesse
           and
           outragious
           courses
           of
           sundrie
           learned
           ones
           ,
           or
           for
           that
           so
           manie
           do
           abuse
           their
           learning
           ,
           euen
           to
           their
           own
           perdition
           ,
           without
           vnfained
           repentance
           ;
           why
           doth
           not
           the
           same
           man
           dislike
           also
           of
           the
           light
           ,
           yea
           of
           riches
           ,
           honours
           ,
           and
           pleasures
           ,
           all
           which
           are
           abused
           commonly
           by
           the
           selfe
           same
           men
           ,
           as
           they
           haue
           occasion
           ,
           as
           much
           as
           learning
           is
           ?
           Good
           learning
           is
           indeed
           the
           heauenly
           light
           ,
           the
           truest
           honour
           ,
           the
           best
           riches
           ,
           the
           sweetest
           pleasure
           .
           Learning
           is
           all
           ,
           and
           all
           in
           all
           ,
           if
           we
           beleeue
           that
           wise
           Salomon
           ,
           
           or
           anie
           of
           the
           graue
           Sages
           who
           haue
           euer
           liued
           since
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           world
           .
           Neither
           is
           the
           learning
           of
           these
           men
           the
           cause
           of
           their
           licentiousnesse
           ,
           but
           this
           is
           it
           in
           truth
           ;
           either
           that
           being
           left
           vnto
           themselues
           ,
           to
           humble
           them
           thereby
           ,
           they
           haue
           put
           out
           that
           light
           of
           learning
           which
           checked
           and
           controlled
           them
           ,
           and
           haue
           chosen
           ,
           in
           their
           courses
           ,
           to
           liue
           in
           darknesse
           rather
           then
           in
           the
           light
           ;
           or
           for
           that
           God
           hath
           therfore
           in
           his
           heauie
           displeausre
           and
           most
           iust
           iudgement
           (
           as
           we
           are
           to
           feare
           of
           manie
           of
           them
           )
           giuen
           them
           vp
           to
           such
           palpable
           blindnesse
           in
           the
           midst
           of
           the
           shining
           light
           of
           this
           last
           age
           ,
           because
           
             they
             loued
             darknesse
             rather
             then
             the
             light
             ,
          
           
           or
           at
           least
           for
           that
           they
           
             receiued
             not
             the
             loue
             of
             the
             truth
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             be
             saued
             .
          
        
         
           But
           wholly
           to
           conuince
           all
           sorts
           ,
           
           that
           learning
           is
           the
           true
           light
           ,
           and
           that
           principall
           part
           of
           mans
           glorie
           ;
           let
           any
           naturall
           man
           aske
           of
           his
           owne
           heart
           ,
           whether
           if
           he
           would
           haue
           his
           child
           brought
           vp
           to
           make
           a
           worthie
           man
           ,
           he
           would
           not
           haue
           him
           trained
           vp
           in
           the
           most
           excellent
           learning
           ,
           notwithstanding
           all
           the
           abuses
           of
           it
           ,
           and
           whatsoeuer
           can
           be
           deuised
           against
           it
           .
           And
           why
           should
           anie
           one
           who
           knoweth
           but
           the
           law
           of
           nature
           ,
           much
           more
           the
           diuine
           law
           of
           our
           holy
           God
           ,
           
             (
             that
             whatsoeuer
             we
             would
             that
             men
             should
             do
             to
             vs
             euen
             so
             we
             should
             do
             to
             them
             )
          
           once
           grudge
           or
           disdaine
           that
           vnto
           others
           ,
           which
           of
           all
           other
           things
           he
           most
           desireth
           for
           himselfe
           &
           his
           ?
           Why
           should
           he
           not
           as
           well
           repine
           against
           them
           for
           the
           vse
           of
           light
           ,
           seeing
           the
           Lord
           in
           his
           rich
           bountie
           ,
           in
           like
           maner
           granteth
           the
           light
           of
           true
           learning
           to
           be
           communicated
           to
           euerie
           one
           ,
           chiefly
           for
           his
           soule
           ,
           as
           he
           shall
           be
           capable
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           he
           hath
           the
           light
           of
           the
           day
           for
           the
           bodie
           ;
           and
           also
           hath
           charged
           all
           most
           strictly
           ,
           to
           seeke
           after
           it
           aboue
           all
           other
           things
           .
           According
           to
           that
           of
           
             Salomon
             :
             Wisedome
             is
             
             the
             principall
             thing
             ,
          
           
           therefore
           
             get
             wisedome
             ,
             and
             with
             all
             thy
             getting
             get
             vnderstanding
             .
             Exalt
             her
             ,
             a●d
             she
             shall
             promote
             thee
             ,
             she
             shall
             bring
             thee
             to
             honour
             when
             thou
             doest
             embrace
             her
             .
          
           Wisedome
           is
           that
           one
           thing
           without
           which
           a
           man
           is
           not
           in
           truth
           a
           man
           ,
           nor
           can
           euer
           honour
           his
           Creator
           as
           he
           ought
           .
        
         
           Yet
           to
           passe
           ouer
           this
           point
           ,
           as
           not
           so
           needfull
           (
           I
           hope
           )
           amongst
           vs
           ,
           especially
           the
           true
           professors
           of
           Christs
           glorious
           Gospell
           ;
           whereof
           neuer
           anie
           one
           was
           a
           sound
           fauourer
           ,
           who
           was
           not
           likewise
           an
           earnest
           furtherer
           of
           the
           best
           learning
           :
           &
           contrarily
           ,
           they
           onely
           who
           haue
           sought
           the
           ruine
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           as
           Iulian
           ,
           haue
           sought
           (
           cunningly
           at
           least
           ,
           and
           vnder
           other
           faire
           pretences
           )
           the
           shutting
           vp
           of
           the
           schoole
           dores
           ,
           and
           the
           bringing
           of
           all
           good
           learning
           into
           open
           contempt
           or
           base
           esteeme
           .
           And
           the
           rather
           do
           I
           represse
           my selfe
           herein
           ,
           for
           that
           this
           point
           hath
           bene
           so
           worthily
           handled
           and
           cleared
           by
           some
           of
           high
           place
           now
           sundrie
           yeares
           agoe
           ,
           and
           all
           obiectours
           put
           to
           silence
           .
        
         
           To
           ret●rne
           therefore
           towards
           our
           proposed
           marke
           ,
           
           &
           to
           consider
           of
           the
           meanes
           whereby
           the
           Lord
           bestowes
           this
           heauenly
           gift
           of
           all
           true
           knowledge
           and
           good
           learning
           ;
           is
           not
           the
           first
           and
           principall
           the
           right
           education
           of
           children
           in
           the
           Grammer
           schooles
           ,
           which
           God
           hath
           ordained
           to
           be
           his
           nurseries
           of
           all
           learning
           and
           vertue
           ?
           In
           verie
           many
           of
           which
           schooles
           abroad
           the
           contrarie
           rudenesse
           is
           notwithstanding
           verie
           much
           to
           be
           pitied
           and
           layed
           to
           heart
           of
           all
           ;
           like
           as
           it
           hath
           bene
           long
           ,
           and
           is
           at
           this
           day
           too
           generally
           complained
           of
           ,
           and
           that
           to
           be
           feared
           not
           without
           iust
           cause
           .
           
           Of
           which
           sort
           are
           all
           those
           wherein
           the
           schollers
           are
           so
           brought
           vp
           ,
           as
           that
           they
           are
           made
           more
           vnfit
           for
           anie
           calling
           ,
           or
           so
           much
           as
           to
           take
           paines
           in
           anie
           profitable
           employment
           .
           But
           these
           true
           
           nurseries
           are
           onely
           such
           ,
           wherein
           learned
           Maisters
           and
           Vshers
           ,
           being
           incouraged
           with
           meete
           maintenance
           and
           due
           rewards
           ,
           do
           follow
           the
           best
           &
           most
           approued
           courses
           ,
           
           labouring
           constantly
           to
           put
           the
           same
           in
           vre
           .
           For
           in
           these
           a
           wonderfull
           difference
           will
           appeare
           ,
           when
           they
           are
           compared
           with
           those
           other
           ,
           in
           which
           the
           right
           meanes
           and
           orders
           are
           litle
           knowne
           ,
           and
           lesse
           regarded
           to
           be
           put
           in
           practise
           .
        
         
           And
           first
           to
           begin
           with
           the
           matter
           of
           learning
           ,
           
           which
           ordinarily
           and
           in
           it selfe
           ,
           through
           our
           naturall
           blindnesse
           and
           dulnesse
           is
           so
           hard
           and
           vnpleasant
           ;
           it
           is
           made
           in
           these
           schooles
           most
           easie
           ,
           and
           replenished
           with
           all
           sweete
           delight
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           for
           the
           manner
           of
           proceeding
           ,
           
           it
           is
           in
           these
           schooles
           so
           direct
           and
           orderly
           ,
           to
           the
           verie
           highest
           top
           of
           all
           perfection
           in
           the
           same
           ,
           that
           the
           things
           taught
           before
           do
           euer
           giue
           light
           to
           those
           that
           follow
           after
           ;
           and
           the
           later
           do
           so
           hang
           vpon
           the
           former
           ,
           as
           that
           they
           haue
           a
           continuall
           dependance
           ,
           and
           also
           the
           scholars
           haue
           a
           continuall
           helpe
           and
           vse
           of
           all
           those
           things
           which
           they
           haue
           learned
           before
           .
           There
           is
           moreouer
           in
           them
           a
           very
           comely
           array
           ,
           as
           in
           a
           well
           gouerned
           armie
           ,
           each
           knowing
           his
           owne
           ranke
           and
           office
           ,
           
           without
           the
           least
           disorder
           or
           confusion
           .
           Whereupon
           the
           painfull
           Schoolemaister
           may
           ,
           through
           Gods
           blessing
           ,
           as
           certainly
           expect
           much
           comfortable
           fruit
           of
           his
           labours
           ,
           as
           anie
           other
           man
           in
           all
           the
           world
           .
           That
           euen
           as
           the
           best
           husbandrie
           bringeth
           forth
           vsually
           the
           greatest
           increase
           ,
           the
           shortest
           and
           safest
           cut
           in
           nauigation
           ,
           doth
           fetch
           in
           soonest
           the
           double
           gaine
           ;
           so
           the
           shortest
           and
           fairest
           way
           of
           teaching
           ,
           shall
           bring
           in
           speedily
           double
           learning
           without
           anie
           losse
           or
           danger
           .
           So
           as
           it
           must
           needs
           be
           great
           follie
           to
           go
           further
           about
           with
           more
           trouble
           and
           perill
           ,
           where
           a
           shorter
           and
           more
           
           sure
           line
           is
           plainly
           directed
           and
           pointed
           out
           vpon
           infallible
           experience
           .
        
         
           But
           for
           the
           fruits
           hereof
           they
           will
           be
           found
           such
           ,
           
           as
           are
           able
           to
           allure
           and
           encourage
           euerie
           one
           ,
           to
           take
           the
           vttermost
           paines
           to
           seek
           out
           &
           to
           practise
           the
           best
           meanes
           which
           euer
           God
           shall
           afford
           .
           For
           in
           the
           meaner
           schooles
           will
           soone
           appeare
           such
           a
           change
           ,
           from
           raw
           and
           rude
           behauiour
           ,
           vnto
           all
           commendable
           qualities
           ,
           as
           if
           they
           had
           bene
           cast
           in
           a
           new
           mould
           .
           
           So
           that
           verie
           children
           will
           begin
           to
           vnderstand
           ,
           write
           ,
           speake
           ,
           oppose
           and
           answer
           ,
           and
           in
           all
           thinges
           so
           to
           demeane
           themselues
           ,
           as
           to
           gaine
           the
           hearts
           of
           all
           who
           shall
           rightly
           make
           triall
           ,
           and
           compare
           them
           with
           most
           others
           .
           
           Whence
           it
           must
           needs
           follow
           ,
           that
           whereas
           learning
           is
           now
           commonly
           so
           basely
           reputed
           of
           ,
           and
           so
           few
           in
           the
           countries
           abroad
           regard
           to
           set
           their
           children
           to
           it
           ;
           yet
           if
           the
           best
           courses
           were
           in
           vse
           ,
           euerie
           one
           would
           desire
           to
           haue
           his
           brought
           vp
           in
           some
           learning
           and
           nurture
           ,
           
           and
           all
           of
           the
           better
           sort
           and
           qualitie
           should
           be
           prouoked
           to
           become
           benefactors
           to
           schooles
           ,
           to
           augment
           their
           maintenance
           and
           encouragements
           for
           the
           nourishing
           &
           increasing
           of
           the
           same
           .
           
        
         
           These
           things
           likewise
           will
           certainly
           accompanie
           such
           a
           right
           order
           of
           proceeding
           ;
           both
           a
           maruellous
           freedome
           of
           the
           Maisters
           from
           their
           wearinesse
           and
           discontent
           ,
           
           and
           from
           that
           ouer-great
           seueritie
           which
           they
           are
           enforced
           to
           exercise
           ,
           or
           else
           to
           do
           litle
           good
           ;
           and
           withall
           a
           ioyfull
           deliuering
           of
           the
           poore
           children
           from
           that
           continuall
           feare
           ,
           whereby
           in
           manie
           schooles
           ,
           the
           greatest
           part
           haue
           bene
           wont
           to
           be
           exceedingly
           dulled
           and
           to
           be
           made
           most
           vnwilling
           to
           their
           bookes
           .
           
           That
           now
           contrarily
           Maisters
           may
           teach
           with
           much
           delight
           and
           comfort
           ,
           and
           scholars
           learne
           with
           an
           ingenuous
           emulation
           ,
           like
           as
           they
           recreate
           themselues
           in
           their
           ordinarie
           sports
           .
           And
           
           for
           the
           time
           spent
           in
           getting
           learning
           ,
           
           assuredly
           more
           true
           ,
           sound
           ,
           and
           substantiall
           learning
           will
           be
           found
           to
           be
           gotten
           in
           such
           places
           in
           seuen
           yeares
           ,
           then
           is
           in
           others
           commonly
           in
           seuen
           and
           halfe
           seuen
           .
           For
           this
           is
           a
           thing
           notorious
           ,
           
           that
           in
           the
           greatest
           part
           of
           our
           common
           schooles
           abroad
           ,
           (
           some
           few
           of
           principall
           note
           excepted
           )
           the
           scholars
           at
           fifteene
           or
           sixteene
           yeares
           of
           age
           ,
           haue
           not
           commonly
           so
           much
           as
           anie
           sense
           of
           the
           meaning
           and
           true
           vse
           of
           learning
           ,
           for
           vnderstanding
           ,
           resoluing
           ,
           writing
           ,
           or
           speaking
           ,
           but
           onely
           to
           construe
           and
           to
           parse
           a
           little
           ,
           to
           steale
           an
           exercise
           ,
           and
           to
           write
           such
           Latine
           as
           anie
           of
           iudgement
           will
           disdaine
           to
           reade
           .
           
           That
           in
           respect
           of
           being
           fit
           to
           be
           sent
           to
           the
           Vniuersities
           with
           credit
           ,
           that
           they
           may
           proceed
           with
           delight
           and
           vnderstanding
           ,
           when
           they
           come
           there
           ,
           they
           are
           commonly
           so
           senslesse
           ,
           as
           that
           they
           are
           much
           meeter
           to
           be
           sent
           home
           againe
           .
           And
           if
           they
           be
           admitted
           into
           the
           Vniuersities
           ,
           it
           is
           not
           without
           the
           griefe
           of
           all
           who
           respect
           the
           credite
           thereof
           .
           
           So
           as
           that
           they
           enter
           commonly
           with
           fowle
           disgrace
           ,
           and
           continue
           with
           much
           contempt
           ,
           to
           spend
           their
           friends
           monie
           &
           their
           owne
           precious
           time
           ,
           which
           might
           haue
           bene
           farre
           better
           employed
           .
           That
           they
           become
           there
           a
           great
           deale
           more
           readie
           to
           anie
           kinde
           of
           exercise
           then
           vnto
           the
           studie
           of
           good
           learning
           ,
           the
           ignorance
           whereof
           proues
           such
           a
           reproach
           vnto
           them
           .
           Hence
           also
           after
           sundrie
           yeares
           so
           euilly
           spent
           ,
           manie
           of
           them
           return
           home
           againe
           ,
           almost
           as
           rude
           as
           they
           went
           thither
           ,
           or
           are
           sent
           abroad
           to
           be
           vnprofitable
           burdens
           ,
           both
           of
           the
           Church
           and
           Common-wealth
           perpetually
           .
           Or
           if
           such
           do
           light
           into
           the
           hands
           of
           painfull
           and
           conscionable
           Tutors
           ,
           
           and
           fall
           to
           their
           studies
           ,
           yet
           their
           Tutors
           must
           then
           act
           for
           them
           the
           School-maisters
           part
           ,
           which
           must
           needs
           be
           verie
           harsh
           and
           vnpleasing
           ,
           yea
           rare
           to
           be
           found
           
           amongst
           them
           .
           So
           that
           in
           stead
           of
           their
           Academicall
           readings
           ,
           they
           must
           be
           enforced
           to
           supplie
           that
           which
           was
           wanting
           in
           the
           Grammar
           schoole
           .
           
           Such
           schollars
           must
           likewise
           vse
           extraordinarie
           paines
           and
           industrie
           ,
           and
           be
           of
           most
           happie
           capacities
           ,
           if
           euer
           they
           shall
           come
           to
           that
           pitch
           and
           height
           of
           good
           learning
           ,
           which
           being
           trained
           vp
           rightly
           from
           the
           beginning
           ,
           they
           might
           verie
           easily
           and
           in
           shorter
           time
           haue
           attained
           vnto
           .
        
         
           Hereof
           the
           complaints
           of
           the
           worthiest
           and
           most
           carefull
           Tutors
           in
           the
           Vniuersities
           giue
           too
           sufficient
           testimonie
           .
           
           And
           though
           such
           scholars
           proue
           neuer
           so
           well
           ,
           yet
           shall
           they
           feele
           the
           want
           of
           the
           Grammar
           schoole
           all
           their
           life
           long
           .
           But
           to
           leaue
           the
           Vniuersitie
           a
           litle
           ,
           and
           to
           returne
           to
           our
           schooles
           againe
           for
           the
           gracing
           of
           thē
           .
           Whereas
           now
           in
           sundrie
           of
           them
           ,
           yea
           some
           which
           are
           of
           good
           maintenance
           ,
           there
           are
           to
           be
           found
           some
           few
           like
           vnprofitable
           drones
           ,
           not
           by
           the
           vnaptnesse
           of
           nature
           ,
           but
           for
           lacke
           of
           better
           guidance
           and
           education
           ;
           then
           contrarily
           should
           we
           haue
           all
           such
           schooles
           generally
           ,
           as
           the
           litle
           bee-hiues
           ,
           
           euerie
           one
           in
           his
           owne
           cell
           ,
           and
           each
           knowing
           his
           owne
           taske
           ,
           and
           all
           gathering
           iointly
           to
           fill
           the
           hiues
           with
           the
           most
           excellent
           life
           honie
           .
           So
           that
           tast
           wheresoeuer
           you
           pleased
           ,
           you
           might
           euer
           find
           most
           sweete
           contentment
           ;
           if
           thus
           the
           best
           courses
           were
           alike
           made
           known
           to
           all
           ,
           and
           care
           had
           that
           they
           might
           be
           constantly
           put
           in
           practise
           euerie
           where
           .
           Yea
           then
           it
           would
           come
           to
           passe
           ,
           that
           whereas
           now
           there
           is
           litle
           or
           nothing
           in
           verie
           manie
           of
           them
           ,
           wherein
           the
           eye
           or
           eare
           can
           take
           delight
           ,
           but
           rather
           those
           who
           come
           to
           make
           triall
           haue
           enough
           at
           the
           first
           ,
           and
           euer
           take
           iust
           cause
           of
           griefe
           ,
           that
           there
           should
           be
           such
           lamentable
           spoiling
           of
           so
           manie
           toward
           youths
           ,
           so
           wretchlesse
           mis-spending
           of
           their
           golden
           age
           ,
           with
           such
           inualuable
           and
           
           irrecouerable
           losse
           and
           iniurie
           to
           all
           ,
           
           yet
           in
           short
           time
           we
           should
           see
           the
           same
           as
           the
           goodly
           gardens
           ,
           &
           as
           amongst
           the
           litle
           singing
           birds
           ,
           in
           the
           flourishing
           Spring
           ;
           where
           we
           still
           looke
           and
           hearken
           after
           more
           sweete
           varietie
           of
           pleasant
           flowers
           ,
           
           and
           of
           melodious
           tunes
           .
           Then
           should
           we
           find
           by
           ioyfull
           experience
           ,
           that
           each
           meane
           schoole
           would
           ●ot
           onely
           excell
           it selfe
           ,
           but
           be
           equall
           to
           manie
           of
           chiefer
           note
           .
           And
           as
           much
           as
           the
           goodliest
           garden
           doth
           excell
           the
           place
           ouer
           growne
           with
           briars
           and
           nettles
           ,
           the
           litle
           bee-hiues
           the
           nests
           of
           drones
           ,
           so
           much
           should
           these
           each
           way
           surpasse
           those
           same
           which
           now
           they
           are
           .
           
           That
           as
           we
           haue
           bene
           grieued
           formerly
           for
           the
           one
           ,
           we
           should
           be
           rapt
           with
           admiration
           of
           the
           other
           ,
           and
           thinke
           all
           our
           paines
           and
           cost
           farre
           too
           litle
           to
           be
           bestowed
           vpon
           them
           .
           Maisters
           should
           be
           much
           more
           encouraged
           to
           go
           on
           with
           cheerefulnesse
           ,
           in
           seeing
           Gods
           blessing
           vpon
           their
           labours
           ,
           and
           by
           hearing
           the
           due
           commendations
           giuen
           to
           their
           scholars
           ,
           then
           by
           anie
           other
           rewards
           whatsoeuer
           .
           The
           children
           should
           euer
           likewise
           haue
           their
           emulation
           increased
           ,
           
           which
           of
           them
           all
           should
           most
           excell
           .
           And
           to
           conclude
           this
           point
           ,
           hence
           it
           should
           come
           to
           passe
           ,
           that
           although
           all
           could
           not
           be
           expected
           to
           excell
           in
           learning
           ,
           
           (
           for
           then
           should
           we
           be
           left
           destitute
           of
           husbandmen
           to
           till
           the
           ground
           ,
           and
           much
           more
           of
           meete
           supplies
           to
           furnish
           all
           other
           callings
           ;
           neither
           is
           it
           possible
           ,
           by
           all
           the
           meanes
           or
           paines
           in
           the
           world
           ,
           to
           make
           such
           to
           be
           scholars
           ,
           to
           whom
           God
           in
           their
           naturall
           co●stitution
           seemeth
           to
           haue
           denied
           it
           ;
           chiefly
           where
           parents
           or
           teachers
           thēselues
           are
           too
           indulgent
           or
           remisse
           :
           so
           that
           their
           children
           are
           disobedient
           ,
           much
           absent
           from
           schoole
           ,
           come
           and
           go
           at
           their
           pleasures
           ,
           neglect
           their
           exercises
           or
           the
           like
           ,
           or
           haue
           bene
           spoiled
           by
           ill
           entrance
           at
           the
           first
           ,
           )
           yet
           these
           things
           would
           follow
           through
           a
           right
           and
           carefull
           gouernment
           .
           
           That
           a
           good
           part
           would
           be
           found
           in
           euerie
           forme
           to
           credit
           the
           schoole
           :
           some
           to
           store
           the
           Vniuersities
           ,
           others
           to
           adorne
           all
           other
           places
           and
           conditions
           of
           life
           ;
           that
           thereby
           might
           be
           had
           men
           expert
           in
           each
           kinde
           as
           necessitie
           should
           require
           ,
           for
           the
           common
           benefite
           and
           good
           of
           all
           .
           
           All
           these
           things
           we
           may
           see
           verified
           in
           some
           few
           and
           rare
           schooles
           ,
           by
           comparing
           of
           which
           with
           most
           others
           ,
           and
           so
           by
           considering
           what
           a
           difference
           there
           is
           (
           onely
           through
           the
           better
           courses
           practised
           constantly
           in
           them
           ,
           )
           we
           may
           fully
           iudge
           of
           the
           truth
           of
           all
           that
           hath
           bene
           said
           ,
           and
           most
           necessarily
           be
           enforced
           to
           subscribe
           thereto
           .
        
         
           Vpon
           the
           due
           consideration
           hereof
           ,
           
           and
           vpon
           much
           and
           loug
           experience
           of
           diuerse
           places
           ,
           together
           with
           the
           certaine
           assurance
           of
           these
           and
           the
           like
           vndoubted
           benefites
           ,
           which
           must
           needes
           ensue
           generally
           vpon
           the
           best
           courses
           of
           learning
           and
           good
           education
           ,
           first
           diligently
           sought
           out
           amongst
           all
           ,
           and
           then
           diuulged
           for
           the
           publike
           good
           ,
           to
           be
           put
           in
           practise
           ,
           I
           haue
           presumed
           to
           endeuour
           to
           my
           poore
           abilitie
           ,
           as
           the
           Lord
           hath
           vouchsafed
           me
           mercie
           ,
           to
           make
           all
           sorts
           partakers
           of
           this
           blessing
           ,
           and
           thus
           to
           be
           paying
           my
           debts
           to
           all
           ,
           in
           communicating
           the
           same
           vnto
           them
           .
        
         
           This
           trauell
           therefore
           hath
           bene
           ,
           
           and
           is
           my
           dutie
           and
           seruice
           ,
           first
           vnto
           you
           all
           (
           ye
           worthies
           of
           the
           chiefest
           ranke
           )
           who
           are
           vnfained
           fauourers
           of
           good
           learning
           ,
           and
           more
           especially
           to
           you
           to
           whom
           the
           Lord
           hath
           engaged
           me
           and
           mine
           ;
           yea
           my
           heartie
           wish
           (
           with
           all
           thankfull
           acknowledgement
           )
           towards
           you
           ,
           in
           your
           children
           ,
           and
           posteritie
           ,
           in
           whom
           you
           are
           to
           remaine
           after
           your
           departing
           hence
           ,
           &
           by
           whom
           you
           would
           haue
           your
           names
           and
           dignities
           still
           preserued
           euen
           in
           the
           earth
           .
           That
           they
           may
           with
           sporting
           ,
           in
           a
           pleasant
           kind
           of
           recreation
           ,
           attaine
           
           vnto
           that
           heauenly
           gift
           of
           learning
           ,
           and
           excell
           all
           others
           therein
           ,
           according
           to
           their
           places
           and
           degrees
           .
           And
           that
           hereby
           they
           may
           adorne
           your
           houses
           ,
           increase
           their
           owne
           honour
           in
           euerie
           kinde
           ,
           to
           become
           principall
           lights
           ,
           and
           pillars
           of
           their
           countrey
           ,
           and
           not
           to
           liue
           to
           the
           ouerthrow
           ,
           or
           the
           dishonour
           of
           your
           houses
           ,
           and
           names
           ,
           much
           lesse
           to
           the
           euil
           example
           ,
           or
           to
           the
           spoiling
           of
           the
           poore
           people
           amongst
           whom
           they
           dwell
           ,
           as
           those
           who
           leaue
           their
           names
           for
           a
           curse
           behind
           them
           .
        
         
           It
           hath
           bene
           and
           is
           my
           debt
           ,
           
           and
           true
           desire
           to
           all
           parents
           ,
           to
           further
           their
           comfort
           in
           their
           beloued
           children
           ,
           that
           they
           may
           see
           before
           their
           eyes
           their
           childrens
           forwardnesse
           in
           learning
           and
           vertue
           ,
           which
           may
           be
           vnto
           them
           some
           recompence
           ,
           of
           all
           their
           loue
           ,
           care
           ,
           and
           cost
           .
           And
           also
           that
           being
           hereby
           encouraged
           to
           bring
           them
           vp
           vertuously
           ,
           they
           may
           alwayes
           haue
           the
           testimonie
           of
           a
           good
           conscience
           ,
           to
           cause
           them
           to
           reioice
           ,
           in
           that
           they
           haue
           had
           this
           first
           care
           to
           prouide
           them
           this
           portion
           .
           Hereby
           they
           may
           depart
           hence
           with
           gladnesse
           ,
           when
           they
           may
           leaue
           those
           in
           their
           places
           ,
           in
           whom
           they
           may
           see
           iust
           hope
           ,
           that
           they
           shall
           liue
           still
           in
           the
           earth
           with
           worthie
           reputation
           .
        
         
           And
           in
           more
           especiall
           manner
           hath
           it
           bene
           my
           studie
           for
           all
           such
           who
           in
           their
           naturall
           and
           tender
           affection
           ,
           
           would
           haue
           their
           children
           brought
           vp
           in
           the
           most
           louing
           and
           gentle
           manner
           ,
           as
           it
           were
           in
           playing
           ,
           and
           with
           ingenuous
           strife
           and
           emulation
           ,
           without
           that
           sharpnesse
           which
           they
           cannot
           endure
           ,
           so
           much
           as
           once
           to
           heare
           of
           .
        
         
           Yea
           to
           all
           likewise
           of
           the
           meaner
           sort
           ,
           
           that
           euen
           their
           children
           may
           the
           more
           easily
           attaine
           vnto
           learning
           ,
           that
           so
           some
           of
           them
           being
           aduanced
           thereby
           ,
           may
           become
           a
           stay
           to
           their
           parents
           ,
           a
           comfort
           to
           their
           kinsfolkes
           ,
           a
           credit
           to
           their
           countrey
           which
           brought
           them
           vp
           .
        
         
         
           And
           to
           come
           vnto
           our
           Schooles
           ,
           
           for
           whose
           comfort
           I
           haue
           chiefly
           spent
           my
           strength
           ,
           it
           is
           my
           loue
           vnto
           you
           all
           ,
           that
           you
           may
           be
           such
           fertile
           Seminaries
           ,
           of
           the
           best
           instruction
           and
           nurture
           ,
           as
           to
           replenish
           all
           places
           and
           callings
           .
           Such
           as
           from
           which
           all
           crueltie
           and
           terrour
           may
           be
           driuen
           farre
           away
           ;
           that
           you
           may
           be
           
             Ludi
             literarij
          
           ,
           truly
           so
           termed
           ;
           when
           the
           Maisters
           may
           teach
           with
           delight
           ,
           and
           scholars
           learne
           with
           delight
           :
           yea
           when
           the
           greatest
           delight
           and
           comfort
           may
           follow
           in
           the
           end
           ,
           in
           reaping
           ,
           and
           enioying
           the
           fruit
           of
           all
           your
           trauels
           .
           When
           as
           the
           meaner
           schooles
           may
           be
           either
           equall
           ,
           or
           at
           least
           come
           neare
           to
           those
           of
           greater
           name
           ,
           &
           the
           chiefe
           may
           seeme
           as
           litle
           Colledges
           ,
           euerie
           yeare
           sending
           forth
           their
           new
           supplies
           ,
           vnto
           our
           renowned
           Vniuersities
           ,
           our
           Innes
           of
           Court
           ,
           and
           to
           all
           other
           places
           of
           principall
           note
           ;
           not
           onely
           to
           match
           our
           aduersaries
           herein
           ,
           but
           also
           to
           surpasse
           them
           in
           that
           ,
           wherein
           they
           haue
           sought
           to
           gaine
           the
           chiefest
           credit
           ,
           &
           to
           giue
           our
           Church
           the
           sorest
           blow
           .
        
         
           It
           is
           the
           debt
           of
           my
           loue
           ,
           
           and
           token
           likewise
           of
           my
           thankfulnesse
           to
           you
           ,
           famous
           Vniuersities
           ,
           by
           endeuouring
           that
           ye
           may
           be
           replenished
           with
           the
           choisest
           plants
           ,
           when
           Tutors
           may
           be
           wholly
           employed
           as
           Tutors
           ought
           to
           be
           ,
           that
           so
           you
           likewise
           proceeding
           in
           the
           best
           courses
           after
           ,
           may
           euer
           flourish
           more
           and
           more
           ,
           in
           all
           the
           liberall
           and
           worthie
           Arts
           ,
           adorned
           with
           the
           sweetest
           Rhetoricians
           ,
           the
           sharpest
           Logicians
           ,
           most
           acute
           and
           wise
           Philosophers
           ,
           skilfull
           Physitians
           ,
           holy
           and
           great
           learned
           Diuines
           ;
           for
           beautifying
           and
           fully
           furnishing
           the
           sacred
           Ministerie
           ,
           
           to
           your
           eternall
           praise
           and
           commendation
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           euerlasting
           glorie
           of
           Christ.
           
        
         
           My
           loue
           to
           you
           who
           haue
           mis-spent
           your
           time
           ,
           and
           estate
           in
           vnprofitable
           courses
           ,
           which
           will
           be
           bitter
           vnto
           you
           in
           the
           end
           ,
           and
           who
           know
           not
           how
           to
           employ
           your
           
           selues
           or
           your
           talents
           .
           That
           hereby
           you
           may
           retire
           your selues
           in
           time
           ,
           and
           not
           onely
           recouer
           in
           a
           few
           moneths
           ,
           that
           which
           you
           haue
           formerly
           got
           in
           schooles
           ,
           and
           now
           haue
           lost
           ,
           (
           as
           experience
           warrenteth
           you
           may
           in
           good
           sort
           )
           but
           that
           you
           may
           moreouer
           grow
           on
           forward
           in
           the
           konwledge
           of
           good
           learning
           ,
           to
           become
           at
           length
           some
           way
           profitable
           to
           the
           Church
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           your
           countrey
           which
           bred
           you
           .
           That
           at
           least
           you
           may
           betake
           your selues
           ,
           if
           not
           to
           the
           more
           fruitfull
           reading
           of
           the
           sacred
           story
           with
           other
           learned
           works
           helping
           thereunto
           ,
           to
           your
           eternall
           saluation
           ;
           yet
           to
           the
           diligent
           studie
           of
           the
           famous
           and
           ancient
           Grecian
           or
           Roman
           history
           ,
           &
           their
           noble
           warres
           ;
           to
           helpe
           the
           better
           to
           preserue
           ,
           and
           defend
           your
           natiue
           countrey
           ;
           or
           for
           the
           succour
           of
           the
           distressed
           parts
           of
           Gods
           true
           Church
           ,
           and
           the
           poore
           members
           of
           Christ
           against
           that
           Roman
           Antichrist
           ,
           as
           you
           now
           see
           the
           Lord
           to
           neede
           your
           helpe
           ,
           and
           call
           you
           forth
           thereto
           .
           That
           thus
           you
           may
           receiue
           comfort
           to
           your
           owne
           soules
           ,
           of
           the
           pardon
           of
           your
           former
           courses
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           Lords
           fauour
           ,
           when
           you
           shall
           walke
           with
           him
           in
           some
           profitable
           calling
           :
           which
           otherwise
           I
           can
           neuer
           see
           how
           you
           can
           attaine
           vnto
           ,
           but
           that
           you
           shall
           find
           the
           flashing
           of
           h●ll
           within
           you
           ,
           when
           your
           consciences
           shall
           be
           once
           thoroughly
           awakened
           ,
           to
           consider
           seriously
           how
           vnprofitable
           you
           haue
           bene
           ;
           and
           of
           that
           fearefull
           doome
           denounced
           against
           the
           vnprofitable
           seruant
           :
           
             Cast
             that
             vnprofitable
             seruant
             into
             vtter
             darknesse
             ,
          
           
           
             where
             shall
             be
             weeping
             and
             gnashing
             of
             teeth
             .
          
           This
           will
           surely
           be
           executed
           vpon
           you
           without
           your
           vnfained
           repentance
           ,
           and
           laying
           liuely
           hold
           on
           the
           Lord
           Iesus
           Christ.
           
        
         
           Finally
           it
           hath
           bene
           ,
           
           and
           is
           mine
           vnfained
           desire
           to
           all
           functions
           and
           places
           ,
           and
           more
           particularly
           to
           euerie
           ruder
           place
           ,
           as
           to
           the
           ignorant
           countrie
           of
           Wales
           ,
           and
           
           more
           especially
           that
           poore
           Irish
           nation
           ,
           
           with
           our
           louing
           countrie-men
           of
           Virginia
           ,
           or
           where
           euer
           else
           ,
           if
           it
           might
           please
           the
           Lord
           to
           cause
           the
           light
           to
           breake
           forth
           vpon
           them
           ,
           which
           now
           fit
           in
           such
           palpable
           darknesse
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           shadow
           of
           death
           ,
           and
           wholy
           vnder
           the
           slauerie
           of
           Satan
           .
           To
           the
           end
           to
           make
           the
           way
           of
           knowledge
           more
           easie
           vnto
           them
           ,
           not
           onely
           to
           the
           attaining
           of
           the
           Latine
           tongue
           ,
           but
           also
           that
           hereby
           they
           may
           much
           more
           easily
           learne
           our
           English
           tongue
           ,
           to
           helpe
           to
           reduce
           the
           barbarous
           to
           more
           ciuilitie
           ,
           and
           so
           to
           plant
           Gods
           true
           religion
           there
           ,
           that
           Iesus
           Christ
           may
           reigne
           amongst
           them
           ,
           Sathans
           kingdome
           fall
           ,
           and
           they
           saued
           eternally
           ,
           if
           the
           Lord
           vouchsafe
           them
           that
           mercie
           .
        
         
           To
           this
           purpose
           I
           cannot
           but
           oft
           thinke
           of
           the
           speech
           of
           a
           worthy
           learned
           man
           whom
           Cambridge
           in
           his
           time
           much
           reuerenced
           ,
           
           who
           hauing
           laboured
           many
           yeares
           with
           little
           fruite
           ,
           amongst
           a
           blinde
           ,
           and
           superstitious
           people
           ,
           was
           wont
           much
           to
           lament
           ,
           that
           he
           was
           enforced
           to
           labour
           in
           a
           barren
           soyle
           where
           salt
           had
           bene
           sowen
           :
           whence
           he
           vsed
           to
           affirme
           that
           the
           chiefe
           hope
           of
           Gods
           church
           for
           all
           such
           pleaces
           so
           nuzled
           vp
           in
           rudenesse
           and
           superstition
           ,
           was
           to
           come
           out
           of
           our
           Grammar
           schooles
           .
           And
           indeede
           for
           bringing
           men
           vnto
           ciuility
           ,
           the
           very
           heathens
           saw
           this
           to
           be
           the
           onely
           way
           ,
           according
           to
           these
           verses
           of
           the
           Poet
           ,
           which
           are
           familiar
           to
           euery
           child
           .
        
         
           
             Adde
             quod
             ingenuas
             didicisse
             fideliter
             artes
          
           
             Emollit
             mores
             ,
             
             nec
             sinit
             esse
             feros
             .
          
        
         
           
             Right
             learning
             of
             ingenuous
             Arts
             ,
          
           
             The
             sauage
             frames
             to
             ciuill
             parts
             .
          
        
         
           This
           was
           one
           chiefe
           cause
           that
           all
           the
           wisest
           among
           them
           did
           so
           much
           prefer
           ,
           and
           euer
           so
           aduance
           learning
           ,
           and
           learned
           men
           .
        
         
           To
           shut
           vp
           this
           point
           ;
           
           this
           (
           I
           trust
           )
           shall
           bring
           a
           
           blessing
           in
           due
           time
           to
           euerie
           one
           ,
           when
           this
           way
           of
           attaining
           to
           learning
           ,
           shall
           become
           so
           plaine
           and
           direct
           ,
           as
           that
           each
           poore
           mans
           child
           may
           with
           a
           litle
           cost
           and
           labour
           get
           some
           vnderstanding
           ,
           to
           know
           how
           to
           serue
           the
           high
           God
           ,
           and
           his
           owne
           necessary
           occasions
           :
           and
           that
           the
           children
           ,
           and
           posteritie
           of
           those
           ,
           may
           come
           to
           the
           knowledge
           of
           the
           truth
           ,
           who
           themselues
           haue
           liued
           in
           most
           grosse
           ignorance
           ,
           and
           extreame
           blindnesse
           .
           By
           the
           meanes
           hereof
           euery
           one
           shall
           be
           the
           better
           enabled
           to
           pay
           that
           debt
           ,
           
           which
           by
           his
           very
           birth
           he
           oweth
           vnto
           the
           Lord
           ,
           and
           to
           his
           natiue
           countrey
           .
        
         
           For
           we
           are
           none
           of
           vs
           borne
           vnto
           our selues
           ,
           
           but
           as
           the
           heathen
           Oratour
           could
           say
           ,
           
             Our
             countrey
             doth
             challenge
             a
             part
          
           (
           of
           our
           life
           &
           seruice
           ,
           )
           
             our
             parents
             a
             part
             ,
             our
             freinds
             a
             part
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           So
           that
           all
           the
           course
           of
           the
           life
           of
           euery
           one
           of
           vs
           should
           be
           bent
           ,
           to
           the
           faithfull
           discharge
           of
           this
           our
           debt
           :
           so
           to
           leaue
           to
           posterity
           a
           thankfull
           remembrance
           of
           our
           well
           deseruing
           of
           them
           .
           If
           the
           heathens
           professed
           this
           ,
           how
           much
           more
           should
           we
           Christians
           oft
           bethinke
           our selues
           ,
           how
           much
           we
           owe
           not
           onely
           to
           our
           countrey
           ,
           &
           to
           the
           Church
           of
           God
           in
           generall
           ,
           but
           euen
           to
           euery
           particular
           soule
           ,
           and
           more
           specially
           to
           those
           whom
           he
           hath
           linked
           vs
           to
           by
           nearer
           bonds
           .
           And
           to
           this
           end
           ought
           each
           of
           vs
           to
           seeke
           ,
           as
           he
           offereth
           opportunity
           ,
           to
           be
           alwayes
           paying
           this
           debt
           of
           ours
           ;
           which
           none
           are
           likely
           to
           discharge
           ,
           so
           well
           as
           they
           ,
           who
           haue
           bene
           best
           instructed
           in
           their
           youth
           .
        
         
           Hereupon
           there
           shall
           neuer
           be
           wanting
           many
           cheerefull
           aduancers
           of
           all
           good
           learning
           ,
           
           from
           which
           so
           many
           blessings
           do
           proceed
           ,
           especially
           when
           learning
           shall
           come
           into
           the
           right
           estimation
           .
           This
           also
           shall
           be
           the
           chiefest
           glorie
           of
           all
           such
           in
           the
           earth
           ,
           to
           haue
           bene
           benefactours
           and
           furtherers
           vnto
           the
           best
           learning
           and
           true
           
           pietie
           ,
           and
           likewise
           a
           notable
           euidence
           of
           the
           eternall
           happinesse
           prepared
           for
           them
           .
        
         
           To
           this
           purpose
           if
           that
           heathen
           Orator
           could
           likewise
           say
           further
           ,
           
           euen
           by
           the
           light
           of
           nature
           :
           
             That
             to
             all
             who
             haue
             preserued
             ,
             helped
             ,
             or
             any
             way
             augmented
             the
             happinesse
             of
             their
             countrey
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             most
             certaine
             place
             ordained
             in
             the
             heauens
             ,
             where
             they
             shall
             enioy
             eternall
             happinesse
          
           ;
           how
           much
           more
           boldly
           may
           we
           Christians
           auouch
           the
           same
           ,
           vpon
           certaine
           grounds
           out
           of
           the
           word
           of
           God
           :
           That
           there
           is
           indeed
           a
           place
           of
           euerlasting
           happinesse
           ,
           and
           glorie
           prepared
           for
           all
           those
           ,
           who
           in
           witnesse
           of
           their
           loue
           &
           thankfulnesse
           to
           Iesus
           Christ
           ,
           and
           to
           their
           countries
           ,
           shall
           employ
           their
           studies
           ,
           and
           their
           wealth
           ,
           to
           the
           greatest
           aduancement
           of
           all
           heauenly
           learning
           ,
           and
           vnto
           the
           vertuous
           education
           of
           youth
           ,
           the
           hope
           of
           the
           succeeding
           ages
           ?
        
         
           Finally
           ,
           
           from
           all
           these
           shall
           the
           glorie
           of
           our
           nation
           be
           enlarged
           continually
           ,
           when
           men
           of
           true
           wisedome
           &
           godlinesse
           ,
           do
           both
           rule
           and
           obey
           euerie
           where
           .
           A
           state
           most
           certaine
           to
           endure
           long
           .
           A
           Prince
           ten
           times
           happie
           ,
           and
           renowmed
           to
           be
           the
           head
           of
           a
           people
           so
           excelling
           in
           all
           true
           wisedome
           and
           vnderstanding
           .
        
         
           Being
           thus
           vndoubtedly
           perswaded
           of
           so
           manie
           and
           rich
           blessings
           to
           ensue
           ,
           
           vpon
           the
           right
           finding
           out
           ,
           and
           making
           knowne
           the
           best
           courses
           of
           teaching
           in
           the
           Grāmar
           schoole
           ,
           without
           the
           least
           euill
           that
           I
           can
           surmise
           ,
           I
           haue
           thought
           ,
           that
           this
           shall
           be
           a
           speciall
           part
           of
           my
           comfort
           ,
           and
           a
           mercie
           aboue
           all
           other
           outward
           fauors
           ,
           which
           the
           Lord
           hath
           euer
           vouchsafed
           me
           ,
           if
           I
           may
           but
           do
           the
           least
           seruice
           herein
           ,
           or
           but
           shew
           my
           desire
           to
           further
           so
           great
           a
           good
           .
           Hereupon
           haue
           I
           bene
           encouraged
           (
           as
           I
           said
           )
           not
           onely
           to
           trauell
           thus
           farre
           in
           it
           ,
           but
           also
           to
           tender
           this
           my
           poore
           seruice
           vnto
           all
           ,
           presuming
           vpon
           the
           
           kind
           acceptance
           of
           it
           amongst
           all
           sorts
           ;
           which
           the
           Lord
           hath
           hitherto
           vouchsafed
           ,
           so
           far
           forth
           as
           I
           know
           .
           Because
           my
           confidence
           hath
           bene
           ,
           from
           my
           first
           entrance
           into
           this
           trauel
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           desire
           of
           my
           heart
           ,
           that
           these
           small
           beginnings
           might
           soone
           receiue
           such
           plentifull
           augmentations
           ,
           as
           in
           time
           to
           accomplish
           all
           the
           good
           which
           hath
           bene
           mentioned
           ;
           and
           as
           the
           Lord
           hauing
           verified
           amongst
           verie
           manie
           ,
           will
           I
           trust
           euerie
           day
           more
           manifest
           vnto
           all
           .
           
           I
           also
           at
           the
           first
           edition
           of
           it
           ,
           hastened
           it
           the
           more
           ,
           because
           ,
           as
           we
           are
           borne
           for
           all
           ,
           (
           as
           before
           was
           said
           )
           and
           receiue
           all
           our
           talents
           for
           the
           benefite
           of
           euerie
           one
           ,
           to
           whom
           they
           may
           do
           good
           ,
           and
           are
           thereby
           each
           so
           deeply
           indebted
           vnto
           them
           ,
           so
           I
           haue
           endeuored
           since
           to
           increase
           my
           former
           experiments
           ,
           and
           to
           make
           them
           vndoubted
           ,
           by
           full
           ,
           and
           most
           certaine
           triall
           (
           as
           I
           trust
           and
           heartily
           pray
           :
           )
           that
           all
           sorts
           for
           whom
           they
           haue
           bene
           written
           ,
           
           may
           reape
           some
           benefit
           by
           them
           ,
           so
           long
           as
           schooles
           or
           learning
           shall
           remaine
           .
           And
           what
           is
           my
           life
           but
           a
           vapou●
           ,
           so
           that
           I
           might
           haue
           bene
           taken
           away
           before
           the
           work●
           had
           euer
           come
           to
           light
           ,
           like
           as
           some
           of
           my
           fellow
           labou●ers
           in
           this
           kind
           haue
           bene
           ,
           (
           of
           whom
           I
           receiued
           some
           of
           these
           directions
           ,
           
           and
           those
           not
           of
           the
           smallest
           moment
           )
           who
           had
           bene
           able
           to
           haue
           done
           farre
           greater
           seruice
           in
           this
           kind
           ;
           
           most
           of
           whose
           worthie
           experiments
           in
           this
           behalfe
           ,
           were
           buried
           with
           them
           ?
           Or
           how
           could
           I
           haue
           euer
           stood
           before
           the
           Lord
           ,
           if
           (
           being
           so
           fully
           resolued
           &
           assured
           of
           the
           good
           that
           might
           come
           by
           this
           labour
           ,
           and
           for
           that
           likewise
           ,
           by
           the
           bond
           of
           the
           Communion
           of
           Saints
           ,
           all
           to
           whom
           this
           benefite
           of
           it
           might
           redound
           ,
           had
           interest
           in
           it
           ;
           the
           Lord
           also
           hauing
           offered
           me
           so
           fit
           oportunitie
           ,
           )
           I
           should
           not
           haue
           sought
           the
           discharge
           of
           this
           my
           debt
           to
           the
           vttermost
           farthing
           ?
           Might
           I
           not
           iustly
           haue
           feared
           ,
           that
           he
           would
           haue
           bene
           
           displeased
           for
           my
           negligence
           and
           loitering
           in
           so
           necessarie
           a
           worke
           ?
           Why
           should
           I
           not
           then
           still
           communicate
           from
           time
           to
           time
           ,
           what
           he
           hath
           further
           vouchsafed
           me
           in
           my
           continuall
           trauell
           ?
           Yea
           why
           should
           I
           not
           stirre
           vp
           all
           my
           louing
           brethren
           ,
           to
           the
           full
           perfecting
           of
           that
           ,
           which
           hath
           bene
           by
           his
           goodnesse
           brought
           thus
           far
           forward
           towards
           the
           same
           ?
        
         
           Why
           should
           we
           suffer
           the
           industrie
           of
           the
           enemies
           to
           be
           a
           condemnation
           to
           vs
           ,
           
           for
           omitting
           our
           opportunities
           of
           accomplishing
           any
           seruice
           ,
           which
           may
           concerne
           the
           glory
           of
           our
           God
           ,
           the
           welfare
           of
           this
           people
           ,
           and
           the
           perpetuall
           benefit
           of
           this
           our
           deare
           nation
           :
           when
           they
           watch
           all
           occasions
           not
           onely
           to
           hinder
           whatsoeuer
           good
           they
           can
           amongst
           vs
           ,
           but
           to
           put
           out
           for
           euer
           the
           candle
           of
           Israell
           .
           
           When
           as
           they
           will
           toyle
           day
           and
           night
           with
           the
           perill
           of
           their
           liues
           ,
           to
           vndermine
           ,
           and
           blow
           vp
           our
           royall
           King
           ,
           and
           Prince
           ,
           our
           Nobles
           ,
           and
           worthies
           ,
           with
           all
           our
           glorie
           at
           once
           ;
           thereby
           to
           make
           an
           easier
           passage
           to
           their
           most
           bloudie
           and
           accursed
           massakers
           ,
           to
           murder
           all
           who
           beare
           anie
           loue
           to
           Christs
           Gospell
           ,
           yea
           to
           destroy
           vtterly
           all
           the
           people
           of
           the
           Lord
           ,
           euen
           through
           the
           whole
           world
           ,
           if
           it
           were
           possible
           ,
           as
           their
           furious
           rage
           doth
           at
           this
           day
           proclaime
           ,
           though
           with
           the
           endlesse
           destruction
           of
           themselues
           both
           soules
           and
           bodies
           ,
           and
           euen
           of
           their
           natiue
           countrey
           their
           mother
           which
           bred
           them
           .
        
         
           Notwithstanding
           ,
           
           I
           haue
           not
           rashly
           attempted
           to
           enter
           into
           this
           so
           great
           a
           worke
           ,
           but
           ,
           I
           hope
           ,
           that
           I
           may
           truly
           say
           ,
           that
           the
           Lord
           our
           louing
           God
           ,
           who
           hath
           holpen
           me
           hitherto
           ,
           hath
           called
           me
           vnto
           it
           .
           And
           this
           hath
           he
           done
           ,
           partly
           enforcing
           me
           by
           necessitie
           ,
           to
           seeke
           out
           the
           easiest
           ,
           speediest
           ,
           and
           best
           meanes
           to
           manage
           this
           my
           calling
           ,
           and
           wherby
           I
           might
           do
           most
           good
           in
           my
           place
           ,
           
           to
           be
           thereby
           in
           some
           sort
           answerable
           to
           the
           same
           .
           Partly
           by
           giuing
           me
           a
           confident
           assurance
           ,
           euen
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           this
           my
           trauell
           ,
           what
           a
           benefite
           might
           come
           to
           all
           sorts
           ,
           by
           the
           read●est
           courses
           once
           found
           out
           ;
           and
           more
           also
           in
           this
           ,
           that
           I
           haue
           seemed
           to
           my selfe
           ,
           by
           his
           goodnesse
           ,
           to
           haue
           from
           time
           to
           time
           gained
           euer
           somewhat
           by
           my
           search
           :
           &
           haue
           withall
           obserued
           how
           much
           some
           few
           schooles
           haue
           excelled
           others
           ,
           chiefly
           through
           the
           better
           courses
           which
           they
           haue
           followed
           .
           Partly
           by
           vouchsafing
           me
           strength
           ,
           and
           cheerfulnesse
           to
           proceed
           thus
           farre
           ,
           still
           adding
           vnto
           me
           some
           new
           experiments
           .
           More
           specially
           by
           causing
           me
           to
           haue
           an
           earnest
           desire
           ,
           and
           an
           hope
           by
           this
           meanes
           to
           answer
           the
           loue
           of
           certaine
           worthie
           friends
           ,
           in
           seeking
           that
           good
           to
           theirs
           ,
           which
           I
           was
           not
           able
           to
           performe
           vnto
           themselues
           .
           But
           aboue
           all
           ,
           hath
           he
           called
           me
           hereunto
           ,
           by
           the
           encouragement
           which
           I
           haue
           receiued
           from
           some
           principall
           benefactors
           to
           schooles
           ,
           
           &
           good
           learning
           ;
           who
           though
           they
           might
           by
           their
           authoritie
           and
           fauours
           haue
           commanded
           all
           my
           seruice
           ,
           yet
           knowing
           my
           endeuour
           herein
           ,
           haue
           both
           most
           louingly
           cheared
           me
           ,
           and
           withall
           somewhat
           supported
           me
           to
           goe
           through
           with
           this
           so
           weightie
           a
           businesse
           :
           
           for
           the
           good
           of
           their
           own
           schooles
           and
           places
           ,
           and
           of
           all
           others
           .
           Who
           haue
           not
           thought
           it
           enough
           to
           found
           or
           bestow
           the
           places
           ,
           and
           to
           endow
           them
           with
           meete
           maintenance
           ,
           vnlesse
           they
           shall
           also
           do
           what
           may
           be
           to
           leaue
           in
           them
           the
           best
           meanes
           of
           all
           good
           instruction
           and
           education
           .
           To
           whom
           not
           onely
           my selfe
           ,
           but
           the
           Church
           of
           God
           (
           as
           I
           trust
           )
           shall
           euer
           be
           beholden
           .
           
        
         
           But
           to
           passe
           ouer
           this
           point
           .
           That
           worthie
           desire
           of
           our
           royall
           Soueraigne
           (
           whom
           the
           Lord
           long
           preserue
           to
           his
           glory
           and
           the
           good
           of
           all
           his
           people
           )
           namely
           to
           
           haue
           all
           good
           learning
           to
           florish
           in
           these
           his
           dominions
           ,
           declared
           so
           many
           wayes
           ,
           &
           specially
           in
           that
           his
           gracious
           incitement
           to
           all
           Schoolemaisters
           (
           in
           the
           conclusion
           of
           his
           Maiesties
           letters
           ,
           set
           before
           our
           common
           Grammar
           (
           ought
           not
           onely
           to
           prouoke
           ,
           but
           to
           binde
           vs
           all
           ,
           who
           haue
           this
           function
           and
           charge
           ,
           to
           indeuour
           our selues
           to
           the
           vttermost
           ,
           to
           search
           out
           still
           the
           best
           meanes
           for
           the
           most
           fruitfull
           training
           vp
           of
           our
           Scholars
           ,
           in
           all
           good
           literature
           and
           vertuous
           conditions
           ,
           where
           he
           so
           royally
           assureth
           vs
           ,
           that
           as
           we
           shall
           receiue
           reward
           of
           Almightie
           God
           for
           the
           same
           ,
           so
           of
           his
           Maiestie
           worthy
           commendations
           .
           And
           therefore
           whatsoe●er
           comfort
           we
           shall
           finde
           by
           our
           trauels
           therein
           ,
           to
           make
           the
           same
           fully
           knowne
           for
           the
           generall
           good
           of
           all
           ,
           as
           God
           shall
           vouchsafe
           vs
           fit
           occasions
           thereunto
           .
        
         
           For
           the
           manner
           which
           I
           haue
           vsed
           in
           all
           this
           proceeding
           ;
           
           the
           Preface
           to
           the
           Reader
           in
           the
           same
           our
           common
           Grammar
           hath
           directed
           me
           ;
           where
           hauing
           affirmed
           that
           the
           varietie
           of
           teaching
           is
           diuerse
           ,
           and
           alwayes
           will
           be
           ,
           for
           that
           euerie
           Schoolemaister
           liketh
           that
           which
           he
           knoweth
           ,
           &
           seeth
           not
           the
           vse
           of
           that
           which
           he
           knoweth
           not
           ,
           and
           therefore
           iudgeth
           that
           to
           be
           the
           most
           sufficient
           way
           ,
           which
           he
           seeth
           to
           be
           the
           readiest
           meane
           to
           bring
           a
           learner
           to
           haue
           knowledge
           therein
           ;
           it
           directeth
           vs
           thus
           :
           
             Wherefore
             it
             is
             not
             amisse
             (
             saith
             it
             )
             if
             one
             seeing
             by
             triall
             an
             easier
             and
             a
             readier
             way
             then
             the
             common
             sort
             of
             Teachers
             do
             ,
             would
             say
             that
             he
             hath
             proued
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             commoditie
             allowed
             it
             ,
             that
             others
             not
             knnwing
             the
             same
             ,
             might
             by
             experience
             proue
             the
             like
             ,
             &
             then
             by
             proofe
             reasonably
             iudge
             thereof
             :
             not
             hereby
             excluding
             the
             better
             way
             when
             it
             is
             found
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             meane
             season
             forbidding
             the
             worse
             .
          
           This
           course
           haue
           I
           followed
           in
           all
           directions
           which
           I
           haue
           here
           obserued
           ,
           &
           set
           them
           downe
           accordingly
           .
           
           Whereas
           it
           may
           be
           obiected
           and
           said
           ,
           
           that
           sundry
           haue
           written
           very
           learned
           treatises
           ,
           concerning
           the
           trayning
           vp
           of
           youth
           :
           I
           answer
           ,
           that
           it
           is
           so
           indeede
           ;
           yet
           (
           that
           I
           may
           speake
           in
           modesty
           as
           the
           truth
           is
           )
           all
           the
           learned
           do
           well
           know
           ,
           that
           they
           are
           such
           ,
           as
           do
           onely
           set
           downe
           the
           same
           in
           a
           generall
           maner
           ;
           or
           do
           write
           of
           some
           one
           piece
           or
           two
           alone
           ,
           or
           at
           most
           of
           some
           few
           parts
           of
           Grammar
           learning
           and
           matters
           appertaining
           thereunto
           ;
           and
           the
           principall
           of
           them
           vnknowne
           to
           the
           common
           sort
           of
           teachers
           :
           or
           else
           they
           are
           beyond
           the
           capacity
           and
           reach
           of
           the
           meaner
           sort
           (
           for
           whom
           this
           is
           cheifly
           intended
           ;
           )
           or
           at
           least
           ,
           they
           haue
           specially
           fitted
           their
           course
           ,
           for
           the
           instruction
           of
           two
           or
           three
           alone
           ,
           to
           be
           trained
           vp
           in
           priuate
           houses
           ,
           as
           our
           renowned
           
             Maister
             A●kam
          
           .
           But
           none
           whom
           I
           know
           ,
           or
           haue
           heard
           of
           ,
           haue
           in
           this
           kind
           of
           search
           and
           triall
           ,
           gone
           through
           the
           seuerall
           parts
           of
           our
           Grammarschoole
           learning
           ,
           applying
           themselues
           for
           the
           weakest
           ,
           &
           for
           the
           common
           countrey
           Schooles
           ,
           thus
           leading
           them
           as
           by
           the
           hand
           ,
           thorow
           all
           the
           whole
           courses
           thereof
           ,
           onely
           according
           to
           our
           common
           Grammar
           and
           most
           approued
           classicall
           Authors
           .
        
         
           Neither
           haue
           I
           in
           this
           ,
           
           followed
           mine
           owne
           priuate
           conceit
           ,
           but
           besides
           searching
           by
           reading
           ,
           triall
           and
           obseruation
           ,
           I
           haue
           first
           for
           many
           yeares
           inquired
           further
           (
           as
           I
           said
           )
           the
           best
           courses
           ,
           from
           the
           most
           experienced
           ,
           who
           haue
           proued
           them
           :
           euen
           of
           such
           as
           haue
           sent
           most
           excellent
           scholars
           vnto
           the
           Vniuersities
           ;
           as
           I
           haue
           bene
           assured
           from
           some
           of
           the
           chiefe
           in
           the
           same
           .
           Secondly
           I
           haue
           made
           triall
           to
           see
           a
           demonstration
           of
           euery
           thing
           .
           Thirdly
           I
           haue
           had
           (
           so
           much
           as
           I
           could
           )
           the
           iudgement
           of
           all
           the
           learned
           ,
           with
           whom
           I
           could
           confer
           or
           communicate
           .
           Fourthly
           ,
           so
           far
           as
           I
           haue
           bene
           able
           ,
           I
           haue
           procu●ed
           yearely
           trials
           to
           be
           made
           by
           some
           of
           the
           best
           authoritie
           ,
           
           learning
           ,
           and
           iudgement
           that
           I
           could
           obtaine
           this
           fauour
           of
           ,
           &
           haue
           intreated
           them
           to
           censure
           all
           things
           frankely
           ,
           and
           to
           direct
           vs
           wherein
           they
           found
           or
           thought
           vs
           defectiue
           ,
           to
           confirme
           and
           encourage
           vs
           wherein
           we
           proceeded
           in
           a
           right
           course
           .
        
         
           Neither
           haue
           I
           conferred
           with
           any
           louing
           friend
           hereof
           (
           so
           farre
           as
           I
           remember
           )
           who
           hath
           not
           approued
           of
           the
           course
           ,
           and
           wished
           all
           good
           successe
           to
           this
           my
           trauell
           .
           
           So
           that
           I
           haue
           not
           posted
           it
           forward
           ,
           but
           hasted
           slowly
           ;
           and
           vsed
           so
           farre
           as
           God
           hath
           granted
           me
           opportuniy
           ,
           all
           meanes
           of
           due
           preparation
           ,
           and
           of
           mature
           deliberation
           :
           thus
           enquiring
           of
           (
           as
           I
           said
           )
           and
           conferring
           with
           so
           many
           of
           the
           best
           experienced
           ,
           as
           either
           my
           calling
           ,
           or
           greatnesse
           of
           the
           charges
           in
           trauell
           would
           permit
           .
           And
           moreouer
           before
           I
           published
           any
           thing
           hereof
           in
           print
           ,
           I
           sent
           some
           draughts
           ,
           vnto
           sundry
           learned
           ,
           for
           their
           helpe
           and
           direction
           ,
           though
           not
           to
           the
           hundredth
           man
           to
           whom
           I
           desired
           .
           For
           that
           I
           was
           neither
           able
           to
           get
           copies
           enow
           written
           ,
           nor
           to
           procure
           them
           written
           truly
           ,
           much
           lesse
           to
           be
           at
           the
           charge
           to
           send
           thē
           abroad
           into
           all
           parts
           ,
           to
           many
           ,
           who
           I
           know
           would
           willingly
           haue
           laid
           to
           their
           hands
           ,
           and
           added
           their
           experiments
           .
           Therefore
           herein
           also
           ,
           in
           steed
           of
           sending
           any
           moe
           written
           copies
           abroad
           ,
           I
           after
           a
           time
           ,
           by
           the
           coūsell
           of
           some
           faithfull
           and
           iudicious
           welwillers
           to
           this
           worke
           ,
           thought
           it
           best
           to
           follow
           that
           worthy
           President
           of
           most
           happy
           labours
           ,
           
             Maister
             Perkins
          
           ;
           who
           when
           he
           was
           in
           hand
           with
           his
           Probleme
           ,
           being
           aduised
           to
           send
           some
           copies
           first
           to
           his
           learned
           freinds
           ,
           answered
           that
           he
           could
           not
           get
           copies
           enow
           written
           ,
           &
           though
           he
           procured
           some
           writtē
           forth
           ,
           and
           by
           good
           scholars
           ,
           yet
           they
           were
           so
           defectiue
           ,
           as
           that
           he
           could
           not
           well
           send
           thē
           .
           And
           for
           that
           cause
           he
           would
           print
           some
           few
           of
           them
           first
           ,
           which
           might
           go
           forth
           to
           
           the
           view
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           and
           so
           he
           might
           heare
           the
           common
           censure
           of
           all
           ,
           and
           receiue
           the
           helpe
           of
           his
           freinds
           ,
           and
           then
           reforme
           accordingly
           .
           Thus
           did
           I
           aduenture
           to
           send
           forth
           the
           former
           draught
           of
           my
           Grāmar
           Schoole
           ,
           with
           some
           other
           parts
           belonging
           to
           the
           same
           to
           the
           publique
           view
           of
           all
           ,
           that
           I
           might
           the
           sooner
           heare
           and
           receiue
           the
           free
           censures
           and
           better
           directions
           of
           all
           louing
           freinds
           ,
           and
           welwillers
           vnto
           this
           worke
           ,
           so
           to
           be
           forthwith
           trying
           ,
           reforming
           and
           supplying
           ,
           like
           as
           I
           haue
           continued
           vntill
           this
           day
           .
        
         
           In
           the
           whole
           worke
           ,
           
           as
           I
           promised
           not
           any
           thing
           but
           my
           trauell
           ,
           which
           I
           haue
           striuen
           to
           performe
           with
           all
           the
           poore
           ability
           which
           the
           Lord
           hath
           vouchsafed
           me
           ,
           so
           I
           take
           nothing
           to
           my selfe
           ,
           but
           onely
           the
           wants
           and
           errours
           .
           The
           rest
           is
           his
           who
           hath
           giuen
           this
           desire
           ,
           and
           prolonged
           my
           life
           ,
           granted
           me
           vnderstanding
           ,
           strength
           ,
           and
           opportunitie
           to
           bring
           it
           thus
           farre
           forward
           .
           What
           directions
           or
           experiences
           herein
           ,
           I
           haue
           receiued
           from
           others
           ,
           as
           yet
           ,
           or
           lately
           liuing
           ,
           I
           would
           haue
           set
           downe
           with
           their
           names
           adioyned
           ,
           like
           as
           I
           haue
           done
           of
           some
           (
           which
           I
           know
           might
           haue
           brought
           much
           credit
           to
           the
           worke
           ,
           for
           the
           authority
           of
           sundry
           of
           them
           ;
           and
           thereby
           euerie
           one
           of
           them
           haue
           had
           their
           due
           )
           but
           that
           they
           did
           not
           thinke
           it
           meete
           ,
           desiring
           to
           be
           concealed
           .
           What
           I
           haue
           gathered
           out
           of
           the
           writings
           of
           the
           chiefe
           learned
           who
           haue
           reuiued
           learning
           in
           this
           last
           age
           ,
           as
           
             Sturmius
             ,
             Melanchton
             ,
             Erasmus
          
           ,
           &
           others
           ,
           either
           shortly
           set
           downe
           ,
           or
           plainly
           poynted
           at
           in
           them
           ;
           I
           haue
           omitted
           likewise
           to
           mētion
           particularly
           ;
           not
           any
           way
           to
           wrong
           or
           detract
           from
           them
           ,
           but
           partly
           for
           that
           I
           did
           not
           note
           the
           places
           at
           my
           reading
           of
           them
           ;
           and
           moreouer
           for
           that
           I
           thought
           that
           labour
           more
           troublesome
           then
           profitable
           to
           the
           Reader
           .
        
         
         
           Neither
           take
           I
           vpon
           me
           any
           way
           to
           prescribe
           to
           the
           meanest
           ,
           
           knowing
           my self
           so
           far
           inferiour
           to
           the
           greatest
           part
           ,
           but
           do
           begin
           to
           thinke
           more
           and
           more
           ,
           of
           this
           weightie
           calling
           ,
           as
           Paul
           did
           of
           the
           sacred
           Ministerie
           ,
           and
           to
           breake
           out
           into
           that
           his
           admiration
           ,
           
             who
             is
             sufficient
             for
             these
             things
             ?
          
           who
           is
           meete
           to
           haue
           the
           treasure
           both
           of
           Church
           and
           Common-wealth
           ,
           with
           the
           hopes
           of
           all
           posteritie
           committed
           vnto
           him
           ,
           and
           much
           more
           to
           prescribe
           perpetuall
           rules
           in
           this
           behalfe
           ?
           Much
           lesse
           do
           I
           pre●ume
           to
           teach
           them
           of
           most
           excellent
           gifts
           ;
           but
           as
           a
           poore
           fellow
           labourer
           for
           the
           common
           good
           ,
           and
           a
           willing
           learner
           of
           all
           ,
           I
           do
           humbly
           desire
           the
           iudgement
           and
           helpe
           of
           all
           the
           chiefe
           learned
           ,
           both
           for
           their
           cause
           who
           wish
           this
           ,
           and
           for
           the
           vniuersall
           benefit
           of
           the
           present
           age
           ,
           and
           of
           all
           posteritie
           .
           That
           I
           may
           see
           still
           both
           what
           they
           approue
           in
           the
           courses
           set
           downe
           ,
           also
           what
           they
           disallow
           ,
           and
           likewise
           vpon
           what
           grounds
           ;
           what
           may
           be
           bettered
           ,
           what
           is
           yet
           wanting
           ,
           and
           what
           is
           superfluous
           .
        
         
           Thus
           is
           my
           hearts
           desire
           ,
           to
           trauel
           in
           it
           still
           ,
           according
           as
           I
           haue
           begun
           ,
           vntill
           the
           Lord
           shall
           accomplish
           the
           whole
           worke
           ,
           which
           although
           it
           should
           be
           seuen
           yeares
           more
           ,
           yea
           many
           moe
           before
           ;
           yet
           the
           Lord
           prolonging
           my
           dayes
           ,
           I
           shall
           euer
           increase
           in
           reioycing
           in
           my
           vndoubted
           assurance
           of
           the
           rich
           blessing
           ,
           which
           God
           will
           giue
           vnto
           it
           ,
           &
           thinke
           all
           my
           labour
           most
           happily
           spent
           .
           But
           herein
           let
           not
           any
           man
           expect
           from
           me
           great
           matters
           ,
           in
           a
           lofty
           kind
           of
           verse
           or
           prose
           ,
           or
           eminency
           in
           declamations
           ,
           orations
           ,
           or
           the
           like
           ,
           this
           I
           leaue
           to
           our
           worthy
           renowned
           schooles
           of
           Westminster
           ,
           Eaton
           ,
           Winchester
           ,
           and
           the
           rest
           both
           in
           London
           &
           elsewhere
           ,
           and
           to
           our
           Schoolemaisters
           of
           chiefe
           fame
           ,
           whose
           breeding
           &
           imployment
           in
           schooles
           hath
           bin
           accordingly
           ;
           and
           who
           
           haue
           ancient
           scholars
           long
           exercised
           in
           these
           kinds
           .
           Cōcerning
           whom
           I
           am
           so
           far
           off
           frō
           enuying
           any
           excellent
           learning
           in
           them
           ,
           that
           I
           wish
           all
           others
           partakers
           of
           the
           like
           in
           their
           kind
           .
           And
           for
           my selfe
           I
           content
           me
           with
           this
           mercie
           from
           the
           Lord
           ,
           and
           blesse
           him
           for
           it
           ,
           that
           I
           haue
           trauelled
           chiefly
           for
           our
           meaner
           &
           ruder
           schooles
           ;
           and
           that
           he
           hath
           vouchsafed
           me
           this
           fauour
           ,
           to
           bring
           my
           worke
           so
           farre
           forward
           ,
           as
           to
           helpe
           to
           direct
           hitherto
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           things
           mentioned
           in
           the
           Contents
           .
           Yet
           this
           I
           humbly
           desire
           of
           all
           such
           of
           principall
           note
           ,
           for
           education
           ,
           gifts
           and
           experience
           ,
           to
           further
           vs
           with
           their
           better
           directions
           in
           all
           these
           exercises
           and
           the
           rest
           ;
           &
           now
           God
           hauing
           so
           accomplished
           my
           desire
           for
           the
           first
           foundation
           ,
           and
           let
           me
           see
           his
           blessing
           vpon
           the
           little
           on
           s
           ,
           I
           will
           labour
           to
           follow
           them
           in
           what
           I
           am
           too
           short
           ,
           as
           fast
           as
           his
           goodnesse
           shall
           enable
           ,
           vntill
           I
           shall
           likewise
           find
           by
           experience
           ,
           wherein
           that
           excellency
           and
           comfort
           of
           theirs
           doth
           consist
           ,
           and
           come
           as
           neare
           vnto
           them
           as
           I
           can
           .
           Though
           therein
           ,
           
             Cum
             in
             primis
             non
             liceat
             ;
             in
             secundis
             tertijsve
             consistere
             pulchrum
             erit
             .
          
        
         
           For
           the
           length
           of
           the
           worke
           in
           the
           Grammar
           schoole
           ,
           
           I
           haue
           in
           many
           things
           contracted
           very
           much
           in
           this
           edition
           .
           And
           for
           those
           things
           wherein
           I
           may
           seeme
           ouer
           tedious
           ,
           as
           namely
           in
           the
           first
           entrance
           of
           children
           ,
           in
           teaching
           Accidence
           and
           Grammar
           ,
           also
           for
           construing
           ,
           parsing
           ,
           and
           making
           Latine
           ,
           I
           would
           haue
           all
           consider
           how
           therein
           I
           haue
           contended
           to
           direct
           the
           carefull
           Maister
           ,
           to
           incite
           both
           himselfe
           ,
           and
           his
           little
           ones
           ,
           as
           by
           play
           ,
           to
           make
           the
           least
           to
           loue
           the
           Schoole
           and
           learning
           ;
           and
           for
           that
           those
           things
           being
           well
           performed
           ,
           all
           the
           difficulty
           is
           past
           .
           Yea
           in
           all
           such
           places
           I
           would
           wish
           you
           euer
           still
           to
           remember
           this
           ,
           that
           I
           wrote
           not
           for
           the
           great
           learned
           ,
           but
           chiefly
           for
           the
           simplest
           ,
           &
           yong
           beginners
           ,
           
           both
           teachers
           and
           learners
           ,
           with
           whom
           I
           cannot
           be
           too
           plaine
           ;
           although
           I
           haue
           and
           do
           still
           striue
           to
           abridge
           whatsoeuer
           can
           be
           ,
           so
           as
           I
           may
           be
           well
           conceiued
           of
           all
           ,
           for
           whom
           I
           labour
           ;
           and
           in
           the
           end
           of
           euery
           chapter
           haue
           vsually
           repeated
           briefly
           the
           sum
           thereof
           .
           And
           knowe
           withall
           ,
           that
           I
           haue
           thought
           it
           my
           dutie
           to
           set
           downe
           whatsoeuer
           I
           haue
           found
           to
           be
           profitable
           ,
           that
           out
           of
           them
           all
           ,
           the
           best
           may
           bee
           setled
           ,
           being
           confirmed
           by
           the
           trials
           of
           many
           .
           In
           which
           respects
           some
           of
           great
           learning
           ,
           who
           perused
           the
           work
           formerly
           ,
           haue
           not
           seene
           how
           it
           could
           well
           be
           any
           shorter
           ,
           nor
           what
           might
           well
           be
           spared
           ,
           especially
           being
           thus
           offered
           to
           the
           publique
           censure
           .
           Consider
           moreouer
           what
           great
           volumes
           haue
           bene
           written
           of
           some
           one
           of
           these
           points
           alone
           ,
           whereas
           my
           indeuour
           hath
           bene
           to
           go
           thorowe
           them
           all
           ,
           shewing
           in
           euery
           one
           ,
           what
           I
           take
           to
           be
           principally
           necessary
           or
           behooffull
           .
           And
           finally
           remember
           that
           which
           Martiall
           wittily
           and
           truly
           affirmeth
           :
           
             
               Non
               sunt
               longa
               quibus
               nihil
               est
               quod
               demere
               possis
               .
               
            
          
           
             
               Things
               are
               not
               long
               ,
               wherin
               there
               is
               not
               ought
               to
               spare
               .
            
          
        
         
           Those
           for
           whom
           it
           hath
           bene
           labored
           in
           ,
           who
           wil
           not
           vouchsafe
           it
           the
           reading
           because
           of
           the
           length
           ,
           would
           much
           lesse
           haue
           taken
           the
           paines
           ,
           or
           haue
           bene
           at
           the
           cost
           ,
           to
           haue
           trauelled
           ,
           searched
           ,
           and
           tried
           to
           haue
           found
           it
           out
           .
           Although
           this
           I
           dare
           constantly
           auow
           ,
           and
           keepe
           within
           my
           bounds
           ,
           that
           it
           had
           counteruailed
           vnto
           me
           both
           the
           labour
           of
           an
           hundredth
           times
           reading
           it
           ouer
           ,
           and
           as
           manie
           times
           the
           charges
           ,
           if
           I
           had
           knowne
           but
           the
           things
           from
           my
           first
           entrance
           into
           teaching
           ,
           which
           God
           hath
           now
           thus
           made
           knowne
           to
           all
           ;
           besides
           the
           freeing
           both
           of
           my
           body
           and
           minde
           from
           much
           toyle
           and
           griefe
           .
           Notwithstanding
           that
           I
           then
           both
           read
           
           all
           whom
           I
           could
           get
           in
           this
           argument
           of
           teaching
           ,
           and
           also
           had
           from
           the
           beginning
           for
           sundry
           years
           the
           aduice
           and
           direction
           of
           *
           one
           in
           whose
           house
           I
           liued
           ,
           who
           was
           well
           knowne
           to
           be
           inferiour
           to
           few
           in
           all
           excellent
           learning
           ,
           and
           euen
           in
           this
           kinde
           amongst
           other
           .
           Neither
           do
           I
           doubt
           ,
           but
           that
           whosoeuer
           he
           be
           that
           would
           do
           good
           in
           this
           function
           ,
           especially
           of
           the
           new
           beginners
           ,
           and
           shall
           peruse
           the
           worke
           with
           desire
           to
           make
           his
           benefit
           of
           it
           ,
           shall
           meete
           with
           some
           one
           thing
           alone
           or
           other
           in
           it
           ,
           (
           which
           if
           he
           will
           practise
           it
           aright
           )
           he
           will
           freely
           acknowledge
           to
           be
           worth
           all
           his
           labour
           ,
           as
           I
           haue
           done
           sundry
           of
           them
           at
           the
           receiuing
           and
           triall
           of
           them
           ,
           and
           much
           more
           shall
           he
           do
           the
           same
           for
           all
           the
           rest
           .
        
         
           Yet
           for
           those
           who
           would
           not
           reade
           ouer
           the
           whole
           treatise
           at
           large
           ,
           
           they
           may
           see
           the
           sum
           briefly
           in
           the
           margents
           ,
           &
           so
           in
           the
           table
           in
           the
           end
           ,
           to
           reade
           what
           they
           desire
           ,
           to
           passe
           ouer
           the
           rest
           .
           But
           for
           them
           for
           whom
           I
           haue
           trauelled
           ,
           I
           had
           much
           rather
           to
           be
           ouerlong
           ,
           to
           the
           end
           that
           I
           may
           omit
           nothing
           which
           concerneth
           their
           helpe
           ,
           
           &
           may
           be
           vnderstood
           of
           all
           ,
           then
           by
           being
           ouer-short
           ,
           to
           omit
           many
           things
           ,
           or
           not
           to
           be
           vnderstood
           of
           the
           greatest
           part
           :
           as
           it
           falleth
           out
           in
           most
           Compendiums
           .
           For
           as
           I
           once
           heard
           a
           great
           learned
           and
           holy
           man
           say
           publikely
           in
           the
           Vniuersitie
           concerning
           Compendiums
           ,
           
           that
           they
           brought
           ordinarily
           but
           a
           compendiarie
           knowledge
           ;
           so
           it
           will
           be
           found
           certainly
           true
           ,
           amongst
           all
           learners
           of
           them
           in
           matters
           of
           any
           difficulty
           ,
           vnlesse
           they
           haue
           the
           help
           of
           good
           readers
           ,
           or
           of
           most
           familiar
           Commentaries
           and
           expositions
           ,
           to
           make
           them
           plain
           .
           Because
           cōmonly
           the
           learners
           do
           imagine
           that
           they
           haue
           gotten
           that
           learning
           by
           them
           which
           indeed
           they
           are
           ignorant
           of
           ,
           and
           so
           ceasse
           from
           searching
           further
           ;
           although
           for
           those
           who
           vnderstand
           them
           fully
           ,
           or
           haue
           meanes
           to
           haue
           them
           
           plainly
           opened
           ,
           they
           are
           of
           most
           singular
           vse
           ,
           for
           the
           easie
           remembring
           and
           practise
           of
           the
           things
           contained
           in
           them
           .
        
         
           Moreouer
           howsoeuer
           I
           should
           not
           be
           able
           to
           attaine
           to
           each
           point
           aymed
           at
           here
           ,
           and
           wished
           ,
           nor
           to
           any
           one
           of
           them
           in
           the
           absolute
           perfection
           ,
           
           yet
           I
           euer
           thought
           from
           the
           beginning
           that
           my
           trauell
           should
           be
           most
           happily
           employed
           ,
           if
           I
           might
           effect
           but
           only
           these
           things
           following
           ,
           or
           some
           of
           them
           ,
           as
           namely
           :
        
         
           If
           I
           might
           but
           set
           others
           on
           work
           ,
           
           to
           search
           yet
           further
           ,
           or
           to
           make
           trial
           of
           these
           experiments
           or
           better
           ,
           for
           the
           ful
           assurance
           of
           all
           sorts
           ,
           to
           finde
           out
           at
           length
           ,
           that
           which
           is
           desired
           .
        
         
           Or
           secondly
           ,
           
           if
           it
           were
           but
           to
           gaine
           the
           experiments
           of
           some
           others
           who
           haue
           most
           happily
           trauelled
           herein
           .
           And
           the
           rather
           ,
           for
           that
           sundry
           of
           chiefe
           experience
           in
           this
           kinde
           ,
           are
           so
           hardly
           drawne
           to
           impart
           that
           which
           they
           know
           ;
           either
           for
           lacke
           of
           opportunities
           ,
           or
           lest
           they
           should
           be
           thought
           to
           presume
           ouer
           much
           ,
           or
           suspecting
           the
           censures
           of
           others
           ,
           or
           for
           some
           like
           by
           respects
           ,
           wherby
           both
           Church
           and
           Common-wealth
           are
           depriued
           of
           their
           due
           ;
           to
           wit
           ,
           of
           such
           singular
           helpes
           as
           might
           exceedingly
           tend
           to
           the
           benefit
           of
           them
           both
           .
        
         
           Or
           thirdly
           ,
           
           if
           I
           might
           but
           make
           known
           amongst
           alsorts
           ,
           sundry
           most
           profitable
           bookes
           and
           helpes
           which
           God
           hath
           to
           this
           end
           prouided
           ,
           both
           for
           Maisters
           and
           Scholars
           ,
           which
           haue
           formerly
           bene
           hid
           ,
           and
           are
           vtterly
           vnknowne
           to
           the
           greatest
           part
           .
        
         
           Or
           fourthly
           ,
           
           if
           I
           may
           but
           only
           help
           such
           of
           my
           brethren
           as
           toile
           without
           fruit
           or
           comfort
           ,
           wearying
           themselues
           in
           an
           earnest
           study
           to
           do
           good
           ,
           and
           do
           mourne
           and
           sigh
           ,
           wishing
           better
           directions
           .
           And
           much
           more
           those
           ,
           who
           neuer
           knew
           any
           good
           proceedings
           ,
           and
           liue
           as
           burdens
           
           to
           the
           publike
           hurt
           ,
           for
           lacke
           of
           direction
           in
           this
           behalfe
           .
           That
           so
           not
           any
           one
           ,
           who
           maketh
           conscience
           of
           his
           calling
           ,
           and
           will
           inquire
           ,
           should
           be
           vnprofitable
           .
        
         
           Yea
           fiftly
           ,
           
           if
           I
           might
           but
           helpe
           the
           common
           sort
           ,
           how
           to
           gaine
           but
           one
           yeare
           only
           in
           the
           getting
           of
           learning
           ,
           
           &
           lessening
           of
           charges
           ,
           chiefly
           for
           the
           poorer
           .
           Albeit
           that
           my
           vndoubted
           hope
           is
           ,
           that
           by
           these
           courses
           alone
           almost
           double
           sound
           and
           good
           learning
           may
           be
           gained
           ,
           in
           regard
           of
           that
           which
           hath
           bene
           and
           is
           in
           many
           country
           Schooles
           ,
           for
           vnderstanding
           ,
           speedinesse
           ,
           certainty
           and
           delight
           .
           That
           little
           children
           being
           rightly
           trained
           vp
           ,
           may
           do
           more
           at
           nine
           or
           ten
           yeares
           old
           ,
           then
           in
           many
           places
           at
           fourteene
           or
           fifteene
           ,
           as
           Master
           Askam
           saith
           ,
           concerning
           the
           Northern
           parts
           in
           his
           time
           ;
           when
           they
           went
           to
           the
           schoole
           little
           children
           ,
           and
           came
           away
           great
           lubbers
           ;
           alwaies
           learning
           ,
           little
           profiting
           ,
           learning
           without
           booke
           euery
           thing
           ,
           and
           vnderstanding
           within
           booke
           little
           or
           nothing
           ,
           as
           he
           rightly
           affirmeth
           .
           And
           for
           the
           further
           euidence
           hereof
           ,
           that
           so
           much
           more
           good
           may
           bee
           done
           hereby
           ,
           it
           is
           very
           apparent
           in
           this
           .
           That
           a
           great
           deale
           may
           be
           gained
           by
           three
           or
           foure
           of
           these
           helpes
           alone
           ,
           
           which
           either
           are
           not
           knowne
           ,
           or
           not
           practised
           in
           the
           ordinary
           Schooles
           .
        
         
           As
           first
           ,
           by
           winning
           a
           yeare
           or
           two
           in
           the
           beginning
           ,
           by
           ●etting
           them
           to
           schoole
           so
           soone
           as
           they
           are
           able
           to
           learne
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           by
           causing
           all
           things
           in
           Schools
           to
           be
           done
           with
           vnderstanding
           .
           Of
           the
           benefite
           whereof
           see
           
             Chap.
             5.
          
           of
           the
           Grammar
           Schoole
           .
        
         
           Thirdly
           ,
           by
           making
           the
           Scholars
           very
           perfect
           ,
           first
           in
           their
           grounds
           ,
           viz
           Accidence
           ,
           chiefly
           in
           Nounes
           and
           Verbes
           ,
           after
           the
           maner
           which
           is
           shewed
           there
           ;
           and
           after
           likewise
           in
           the
           Grammar
           it selfe
           ,
           for
           the
           perfect
           vse
           ,
           vnderstanding
           
           and
           applying
           of
           the
           rules
           .
           This
           will
           gaine
           much
           in
           time
           ,
           and
           more
           in
           ease
           and
           certainty
           then
           can
           be
           imagined
           .
        
         
           Fourthly
           ,
           by
           making
           them
           very
           perfect
           in
           their
           authors
           ,
           as
           they
           proceed
           .
        
         
           Fiftly
           ,
           by
           the
           knowledge
           and
           practise
           of
           the
           rule
           of
           construing
           ,
           and
           of
           translations
           formed
           according
           vnto
           the
           same
           ,
           for
           all
           the
           lower
           sort
           .
        
         
           Sixtly
           ,
           by
           hauing
           in
           all
           things
           the
           most
           easie
           ,
           sure
           ,
           and
           excellent
           patternes
           to
           follow
           ;
           which
           ,
           they
           being
           kept
           vnto
           constantly
           ,
           must
           needes
           come
           in
           time
           to
           expresse
           very
           liuely
           ,
           or
           at
           least
           come
           neere
           vnto
           them
           .
           To
           omit
           the
           benefit
           of
           increasing
           in
           our
           owne
           toung
           as
           in
           the
           Latin
           ;
           and
           all
           things
           for
           going
           certainly
           without
           staggering
           or
           doubting
           ,
           and
           much
           more
           by
           their
           growing
           in
           their
           writing
           ,
           together
           with
           their
           other
           learning
           ,
           &
           that
           by
           one
           and
           the
           same
           labour
           .
        
         
           Now
           if
           by
           these
           few
           so
           much
           may
           be
           gained
           ,
           and
           much
           more
           by
           all
           the
           rest
           together
           ,
           being
           constantly
           practised
           :
           then
           let
           euery
           man
           iudge
           what
           we
           might
           certainly
           expect
           ,
           if
           many
           moe
           learned
           well-willers
           ,
           would
           adde
           still
           but
           each
           his
           seuerall
           experiment
           .
        
         
           These
           same
           ,
           amongst
           others
           ,
           haue
           bene
           the
           seuerall
           ends
           ,
           whereat
           I
           haue
           aimed
           ,
           and
           thought
           my
           labours
           should
           be
           happily
           emploied
           ,
           if
           I
           might
           in
           any
           sort
           attaine
           vnto
           them
           .
           Wherein
           how
           farre
           the
           Lord
           hath
           vouchsafed
           to
           fulfill
           my
           desire
           ,
           I
           refer
           it
           to
           euery
           one
           who
           hath
           or
           shall
           duely
           make
           triall
           of
           that
           which
           I
           haue
           written
           .
        
         
           That
           I
           do
           in
           this
           worke
           so
           much
           account
           of
           Grammaticall
           translations
           ,
           
           which
           I
           so
           oft
           mention
           in
           the
           Grammar
           schoole
           ,
           as
           namely
           Chap.
           8.
           where
           I
           shew
           the
           manner
           ,
           vse
           and
           benefit
           of
           them
           ,
           I
           hope
           that
           this
           wil
           be
           
           found
           true
           by
           experience
           ,
           that
           after
           children
           haue
           bene
           well
           trained
           vp
           in
           their
           Accidence
           ,
           and
           a
           litle
           entred
           and
           acquainted
           with
           them
           ,
           following
           the
           courses
           directed
           for
           thē
           ,
           they
           will
           go
           ouer
           their
           whole
           Authors
           so
           translated
           ,
           by
           the
           help
           of
           thē
           ,
           before
           they
           could
           haue
           gone
           through
           one
           third
           part
           of
           them
           without
           .
           And
           also
           that
           they
           will
           learne
           their
           authors
           far
           more
           perfectly
           for
           each
           good
           vse
           ,
           and
           keepe
           them
           much
           more
           surely
           ,
           with
           lesse
           labour
           or
           trouble
           ;
           besides
           that
           they
           shall
           continually
           learne
           by
           them
           to
           make
           Latine
           truly
           and
           purely
           ,
           and
           to
           get
           matter
           and
           phrase
           ,
           aswell
           as
           to
           construe
           and
           parse
           .
           And
           furthermore
           because
           in
           all
           the
           formes
           which
           shall
           vse
           them
           ,
           chiefly
           in
           the
           higher
           ,
           they
           wil
           be
           found
           for
           the
           most
           part
           to
           be
           in
           stead
           of
           the
           Maisters
           or
           Vshers
           labour
           ,
           and
           euer
           certaine
           ,
           teaching
           English
           as
           wel
           as
           Latine
           ,
           without
           any
           of
           the
           inconueniences
           vsually
           imagined
           ;
           so
           that
           there
           be
           a
           wise
           direction
           and
           ouersight
           ,
           as
           in
           all
           other
           things
           ,
           that
           they
           be
           vsed
           aright
           .
        
         
           Besides
           experience
           ,
           the
           reasons
           are
           most
           euident
           ,
           as
           I
           haue
           shewed
           in
           their
           place
           ;
           
           especially
           by
           making
           all
           their
           authors
           to
           be
           so
           easily
           and
           soone
           vnderstood
           ,
           and
           then
           for
           the
           continuall
           practise
           by
           them
           of
           the
           Grammar
           Analysis
           and
           Genesis
           :
           and
           finally
           that
           by
           them
           may
           be
           such
           a
           daily
           vse
           of
           translating
           both
           into
           English
           &
           Latin
           :
           all
           which
           are
           so
           highly
           commended
           by
           the
           learned
           ,
           for
           the
           speedy
           getting
           of
           any
           tongue
           .
           And
           hereunto
           the
           two
           first
           leaues
           of
           
             Master
             Askams
          
           Schoolmaster
           whom
           I
           principally
           esteeme
           and
           propound
           ,
           
           do
           giue
           sufficient
           testimony
           .
           Hee
           in
           the
           very
           entrance
           of
           his
           booke
           ,
           sharply
           reproouing
           the
           common
           order
           of
           making
           Latins
           practised
           in
           Schooles
           ;
           and
           hauing
           shewed
           how
           by
           that
           (
           as
           it
           is
           comonly
           said
           )
           children
           are
           vtterly
           marred
           ,
           and
           also
           hauing
           giuen
           most
           manifest
           reasons
           of
           
           the
           hurt
           which
           comes
           thereof
           ,
           for
           the
           feare
           that
           children
           are
           driuen
           into
           :
           affirming
           moreouer
           ,
           that
           nothing
           hath
           more
           dulled
           the
           wits
           ,
           or
           taken
           away
           the
           wils
           of
           children
           from
           learning
           ,
           then
           that
           :
           and
           lastly
           how
           they
           learne
           euill
           choise
           of
           words
           ,
           wrong
           placing
           ,
           and
           ill
           framing
           of
           sentences
           ,
           and
           that
           which
           they
           must
           vnlearne
           againe
           ;
           he
           afterwards
           speakes
           thus
           ,
           concerning
           this
           kinde
           of
           translating
           ,
           and
           the
           benifits
           of
           it
           .
        
         
           There
           is
           a
           way
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           touched
           in
           the
           first
           booke
           of
           
             Cicero
             de
             Oratore
          
           ,
           
           which
           wisely
           brought
           into
           Schooles
           ,
           truly
           taught
           ,
           and
           constantly
           vsed
           ,
           would
           not
           onely
           take
           away
           that
           butcherly
           feare
           of
           making
           Latines
           ,
           but
           also
           with
           ease
           and
           pleasure
           ,
           and
           in
           short
           time
           ,
           as
           I
           know
           by
           good
           experience
           ,
           worke
           a
           true
           choise
           ,
           and
           placing
           of
           words
           ,
           a
           right
           ordering
           of
           sentences
           ,
           an
           easie
           vnderstanding
           of
           the
           tongue
           ,
           or
           readinesse
           to
           speake
           ,
           facilitie
           to
           write
           ,
           a
           true
           iudgment
           both
           of
           his
           owne
           and
           other
           mens
           doings
           ;
           what
           toung
           soeuer
           he
           doth
           vse
           .
           Then
           he
           setteth
           downe
           the
           manner
           ,
           how
           the
           child
           should
           be
           taught
           to
           translate
           a
           peece
           of
           Tully
           ,
           or
           a
           like
           Author
           thus
           plainly
           ,
           &
           afterwards
           out
           of
           his
           translation
           to
           turne
           it
           into
           the
           Latin
           of
           the
           Author
           againe
           ;
           and
           then
           by
           comparing
           with
           the
           Author
           to
           see
           how
           neere
           he
           came
           ,
           and
           where
           he
           missed
           ;
           so
           to
           amend
           it
           ,
           still
           striuing
           vntill
           he
           come
           to
           expresse
           his
           Author
           truly
           .
           By
           this
           he
           saith
           ,
           the
           maister
           may
           teach
           all
           those
           things
           which
           are
           most
           tedious
           and
           difficult
           without
           any
           errour
           ,
           and
           the
           scholar
           may
           learne
           without
           any
           great
           paine
           ,
           the
           Maister
           being
           led
           by
           so
           sure
           a
           guide
           ,
           &
           the
           scholar
           brought
           into
           so
           plaine
           and
           easie
           a
           way
           .
           This
           is
           the
           summe
           of
           
             Maister
             Askams
          
           speech
           .
        
         
           Now
           these
           Grammaticall
           translations
           of
           our
           lowest
           Schoole
           Authors
           ,
           do
           performe
           the
           same
           things
           for
           
           all
           young
           scholars
           farre
           more
           surely
           and
           speedily
           .
        
         
           More
           surely
           ,
           because
           the
           scholar
           translating
           into
           English
           of
           himselfe
           ,
           vnlesse
           the
           Maister
           vse
           maruellous
           diligence
           ,
           before
           in
           making
           him
           very
           perfect
           in
           the
           true
           construing
           of
           it
           ,
           and
           as
           much
           after
           in
           perusing
           &
           amending
           euery
           thing
           which
           is
           faulty
           ,
           the
           child
           wil
           misse
           in
           translating
           ;
           and
           if
           he
           translate
           falsly
           into
           English
           ,
           or
           misse
           of
           the
           Grammaticall
           order
           ,
           he
           can
           not
           translate
           into
           the
           same
           Latine
           againe
           ,
           vpon
           sure
           grounds
           and
           reason
           ,
           vnlesse
           he
           go
           by
           rote
           ,
           as
           we
           say
           .
           Moreouer
           that
           labour
           for
           so
           perusing
           the
           translations
           ,
           of
           euery
           one
           of
           each
           forme
           thorough
           a
           Schoole
           ,
           would
           be
           endlesse
           in
           the
           greater
           schooles
           ,
           and
           much
           more
           when
           they
           haue
           turned
           it
           into
           Latine
           ,
           for
           comparing
           all
           with
           the
           Author
           ,
           and
           reducing
           each
           thing
           into
           the
           right
           order
           ;
           whereas
           these
           being
           so
           translated
           vnto
           their
           hands
           ,
           do
           first
           guide
           them
           certainly
           how
           to
           construe
           or
           to
           translate
           ,
           to
           reade
           all
           things
           which
           they
           learne
           by
           them
           ,
           into
           a
           true
           translation
           ,
           and
           consequently
           to
           turne
           them
           perfectly
           into
           the
           Latine
           of
           the
           Authour
           againe
           .
        
         
           These
           do
           it
           also
           more
           speedily
           ,
           
           in
           as
           much
           as
           they
           may
           reade
           ouer
           many
           lines
           turning
           them
           into
           English
           or
           Latine
           before
           that
           they
           can
           write
           one
           .
           Although
           that
           kind
           of
           translating
           by
           pen
           of
           themselues
           ,
           both
           into
           English
           and
           Latine
           ,
           hath
           also
           her
           due
           place
           and
           singular
           vse
           ,
           for
           some
           speciall
           benefits
           thereof
           ,
           as
           writing
           true
           Orthographie
           ,
           and
           the
           like
           ,
           as
           I
           shall
           shew
           in
           the
           handling
           of
           it
           .
        
         
           Furthermore
           ,
           
           this
           very
           course
           of
           translating
           peeces
           of
           Tully
           or
           the
           like
           good
           Author
           ,
           into
           plaine
           naturall
           English
           ,
           by
           the
           Maister
           himselfe
           ,
           and
           giuing
           them
           to
           the
           Scholar
           to
           turne
           into
           Latine
           ,
           to
           trie
           how
           neere
           he
           can
           come
           to
           the
           Author
           ,
           and
           then
           comparing
           it
           with
           the
           
           Author
           ,
           he
           sets
           downe
           in
           the
           beginning
           of
           his
           second
           booke
           ,
           page
           2.
           
        
         
           By
           this
           meanes
           he
           saw
           that
           experience
           which
           might
           seeme
           almost
           incredible
           ,
           
           in
           that
           hopefull
           young
           Gentleman
           (
           whose
           death
           he
           so
           much
           bewaileth
           )
           Maister
           
             Iohn
             VVhitney
          
           ,
           in
           Sir
           
             Anthony
             Dennies
          
           house
           ,
           where
           the
           Ladie
           Elizabeth
           did
           lye
           ,
           when
           he
           came
           to
           serue
           her
           ;
           that
           within
           lesse
           then
           the
           space
           of
           a
           yeare
           ,
           he
           had
           so
           profited
           in
           writing
           pure
           Latine
           ,
           that
           (
           as
           he
           saith
           )
           some
           in
           seuen
           yeares
           in
           the
           Grammar
           Schooles
           ,
           yea
           some
           in
           the
           Vniuersities
           ,
           could
           not
           do
           halfe
           so
           well
           .
           So
           afterwards
           he
           saw
           the
           like
           in
           his
           happiest
           Schollar
           that
           euer
           England
           had
           bred
           ,
           our
           late
           Queene
           ,
           who
           made
           vs
           all
           happie
           ;
           who
           ,
           as
           hee
           saith
           ,
           did
           so
           farre
           surpasse
           all
           of
           her
           yeares
           in
           excellencie
           of
           Learning
           ,
           
           and
           knowledge
           of
           diuers
           Tongues
           ,
           that
           verie
           fewe
           of
           the
           rarest
           wits
           in
           the
           Vniuersities
           could
           any
           way
           reach
           vnto
           her
           .
           And
           this
           seemeth
           euidently
           to
           haue
           bene
           the
           chiefe
           meanes
           ;
           like
           as
           he
           prooueth
           at
           large
           ,
           by
           the
           authoritie
           of
           many
           great
           learned
           ,
           this
           way
           of
           translating
           ,
           to
           be
           either
           the
           onely
           ,
           or
           at
           least
           the
           chiefe
           ,
           readie
           ,
           and
           sure
           meanes
           to
           attaine
           speedily
           to
           any
           tongue
           .
        
         
           And
           that
           I
           may
           adde
           but
           one
           other
           testimonie
           of
           a
           rare
           and
           knowne
           experience
           in
           this
           kind
           .
           
           At
           the
           Commencement
           of
           that
           right
           noble
           ,
           and
           memorable
           Gentleman
           ,
           Sir
           
             Iohn
             Harington
          
           ,
           (
           who
           now
           rests
           and
           reignes
           with
           the
           Lord
           )
           hauing
           speech
           with
           Maister
           Touey
           ,
           who
           had
           bene
           a
           Schoolmaister
           ,
           equall
           (
           as
           he
           was
           indged
           )
           to
           most
           of
           the
           chiefe
           in
           that
           kind
           ;
           but
           was
           then
           wholly
           employed
           for
           the
           attendance
           and
           tuition
           of
           that
           young
           Noble-man
           (
           with
           whom
           he
           also
           liues
           now
           in
           heauen
           ,
           )
           I
           desired
           to
           know
           this
           of
           him
           :
           that
           whereas
           I
           had
           writ
           vnto
           him
           formerly
           ,
           to
           haue
           taken
           some
           paines
           ,
           in
           setting
           
           downe
           the
           shortest
           and
           best
           way
           of
           teaching
           ,
           according
           to
           his
           experience
           ;
           and
           now
           there
           was
           a
           rare
           fame
           ,
           that
           God
           had
           giuen
           an
           extraordinarie
           blessing
           to
           his
           endeuours
           with
           that
           young
           Noble-man
           ,
           so
           that
           he
           did
           of
           a
           sodaine
           go
           farre
           beyond
           most
           others
           of
           his
           time
           ,
           (
           aboue
           all
           former
           expectation
           :
           )
           that
           he
           would
           vouchsafe
           to
           impart
           vnto
           me
           ,
           in
           a
           word
           or
           two
           ,
           what
           were
           the
           principall
           meanes
           he
           had
           vsed
           thereto
           .
           He
           acknowledging
           thankfully
           ,
           that
           he
           had
           indeed
           seene
           much
           experience
           of
           Gods
           mercie
           therein
           ,
           told
           mee
           ,
           that
           this
           was
           the
           principall
           and
           summe
           of
           his
           course
           :
           That
           he
           had
           bene
           enforced
           to
           begin
           againe
           ,
           euen
           from
           the
           verie
           Accidence
           ,
           causing
           him
           to
           get
           the
           perfect
           vnderstanding
           of
           the
           Rules
           ,
           for
           the
           meaning
           and
           vse
           ,
           though
           he
           could
           not
           the
           words
           in
           so
           short
           a
           time
           ;
           and
           after
           that
           ,
           he
           had
           caused
           him
           to
           practise
           continual
           translating
           into
           Latine
           ,
           after
           this
           manner
           .
           That
           he
           himselfe
           had
           chosen
           easie
           places
           of
           Tully
           ,
           and
           other
           familiar
           Authors
           ,
           which
           the
           Gentleman
           knew
           not
           ,
           and
           caused
           him
           to
           turne
           them
           into
           Latine
           ,
           and
           after
           brought
           him
           to
           the
           Author
           ,
           to
           compare
           that
           which
           he
           had
           written
           ,
           to
           the
           same
           ,
           iust
           according
           to
           this
           last
           manner
           mentioned
           out
           of
           Maister
           Askam
           .
           After
           ,
           rounding
           me
           in
           the
           eare
           ,
           he
           said
           ;
           But
           shall
           I
           tell
           you
           ,
           
             It
             was
             by
             Prayer
          
           ,
           quoth
           he
           .
           Hereupon
           ,
           after
           my
           returne
           ,
           I
           set
           my selfe
           to
           put
           all
           these
           in
           practise
           ,
           yet
           more
           seriously
           then
           formerly
           I
           had
           done
           .
           But
           for
           this
           kinde
           of
           translating
           ,
           finding
           the
           toyle
           and
           impossibilitie
           of
           it
           ,
           first
           to
           translate
           peeces
           fit
           for
           euerie
           Forme
           ,
           and
           after
           to
           examine
           euerie
           ones
           exercise
           ,
           how
           he
           had
           translated
           ,
           and
           to
           correct
           them
           ;
           I
           wholly
           bent
           my selfe
           to
           trie
           how
           this
           might
           be
           done
           ,
           thorow
           the
           seuerall
           lower
           Formes
           ,
           that
           they
           might
           haue
           most
           practise
           of
           it
           .
        
         
           Thus
           trying
           sundrie
           waies
           ,
           which
           were
           ouer-long
           to
           
           recite
           ,
           and
           amongst
           others
           ,
           hauing
           seene
           in
           a
           chiefe
           Schoole
           in
           London
           ,
           good
           vse
           of
           verball
           translations
           ;
           amongst
           some
           other
           things
           ,
           I
           began
           to
           thinke
           ,
           that
           by
           the
           meanes
           of
           translations
           of
           the
           first
           Authors
           which
           Scholars
           learne
           ,
           this
           translating
           might
           be
           practised
           in
           each
           lower
           Forme
           continually
           .
           But
           there
           were
           yet
           two
           maine
           difficulties
           ,
           which
           had
           formerly
           hindred
           me
           from
           any
           such
           vse
           of
           them
           .
           First
           ,
           that
           our
           vsuall
           translations
           did
           direct
           the
           young
           Scholars
           vncertainly
           ,
           and
           sometimes
           amisse
           ,
           being
           oft
           rather
           to
           expresse
           the
           sense
           ,
           then
           the
           words
           in
           anie
           right
           order
           of
           Grammar
           ;
           and
           that
           the
           learners
           must
           go
           by
           memorie
           ,
           and
           as
           it
           were
           by
           rote
           ,
           more
           then
           by
           anie
           certaintie
           of
           Rule
           ,
           vnlesse
           they
           were
           of
           better
           iudgement
           .
           And
           secondly
           ,
           that
           for
           this
           and
           other
           inconueniences
           ,
           translations
           were
           generally
           in
           disgrace
           in
           Schooles
           .
           Therefore
           ,
           this
           then
           I
           thought
           necessarie
           to
           be
           my
           first
           labour
           ,
           to
           finde
           out
           some
           certaine
           rule
           to
           follow
           ,
           according
           to
           which
           to
           frame
           these
           translations
           ,
           and
           which
           might
           be
           the
           guide
           of
           all
           .
        
         
           And
           herein
           I
           ,
           
           vnder
           Iesus
           Christ
           ,
           acknowledge
           my selfe
           be
           holden
           for
           the
           rule
           of
           construing
           and
           translating
           ,
           in
           the
           beginning
           of
           my
           Schoole
           labours
           ,
           now
           aboue
           30.
           yeares
           ago
           ,
           first
           to
           Maister
           Crusius
           :
           since
           to
           the
           reuerend
           and
           ancient
           Schoole-maister
           ,
           Maister
           Leech
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           after
           them
           to
           that
           painefull
           ,
           Maister
           Coote
           ,
           of
           Hunsden
           in
           Essex
           ,
           now
           with
           the
           Lord.
           And
           fourthly
           ,
           to
           that
           learned
           Go●leuius
           ,
           and
           to
           some
           other
           of
           my
           acquaintance
           ,
           who
           had
           likewise
           taken
           paines
           in
           this
           rule
           ,
           which
           they
           willingly
           imparted
           vnto
           me
           .
        
         
           And
           so
           from
           that
           time
           vntil
           this
           day
           ,
           
           I
           haue
           still
           bene
           labouring
           to
           find
           out
           the
           rule
           more
           exactly
           ,
           &
           to
           frame
           the
           translations
           according
           to
           the
           same
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           this
           hath
           bene
           my
           next
           studie
           ,
           to
           seeke
           out
           the
           right
           vses
           and
           
           benefits
           of
           these
           translations
           ,
           
           and
           so
           in
           all
           things
           to
           set
           them
           downe
           ,
           as
           they
           might
           be
           a
           certaine
           direction
           ,
           wherby
           most
           easily
           and
           surely
           to
           reape
           the
           fruite
           of
           them
           .
           Lastly
           I
           haue
           trauelled
           herein
           specially
           to
           haue
           full
           triall
           &
           assurance
           in
           euerie
           thing
           ,
           
           that
           as
           I
           had
           gathered
           these
           amongst
           other
           experiments
           ,
           for
           the
           vse
           of
           all
           schooles
           ,
           so
           vpon
           certaine
           proofe
           by
           my selfe
           ,
           and
           other
           of
           better
           iudgement
           ,
           I
           might
           at
           length
           commend
           them
           to
           all
           learners
           ,
           and
           so
           helpe
           to
           bring
           in
           that
           excellent
           vse
           of
           them
           (
           which
           
             Maister
             Askam
          
           aduised
           )
           euen
           into
           the
           Schooles
           ,
           in
           which
           they
           had
           bene
           so
           formerly
           distasted
           ,
           as
           that
           it
           was
           thought
           a
           Paradox
           ,
           but
           to
           name
           the
           vse
           of
           translations
           i●
           them
           .
        
         
           Now
           vpon
           this
           rule
           ,
           
           and
           the
           expressing
           euerie
           thing
           in
           the
           translations
           ,
           both
           in
           proprietie
           ,
           and
           also
           according
           to
           the
           sence
           and
           meaning
           of
           the
           author
           ,
           with
           varietie
           of
           other
           English
           phrases
           ,
           and
           supplying
           what
           is
           wanting
           ,
           to
           make
           vp
           the
           construction
           ,
           with
           the
           other
           things
           obserued
           therein
           ,
           especially
           vpon
           the
           rule
           ,
           depend
           all
           the
           chiefe
           benefits
           ,
           for
           a
           certaine
           Analysis
           and
           Genesis
           ;
           both
           for
           construing
           ,
           parsing
           ,
           making
           and
           tying
           Latin
           surely
           ,
           and
           sundrie
           of
           the
           rest
           ,
           
           as
           is
           shewed
           at
           large
           in
           the
           eight
           Chapter
           of
           the
           Grammar
           Schoole
           .
        
         
           By
           the
           right
           practise
           of
           these
           translations
           ,
           so
           framed
           ,
           as
           I
           am
           fully
           assured
           ,
           
           by
           long
           experience
           ,
           through
           the
           Lords
           mercie
           and
           goodnesse
           ,
           an
           increase
           will
           be
           found
           in
           learning
           ,
           farre
           more
           then
           can
           be
           well
           conceiued
           ,
           before
           due
           triall
           made
           ,
           and
           that
           with
           much
           lesse
           trouble
           to
           the
           Maister
           then
           otherwise
           :
           and
           with
           farre
           more
           delight
           ,
           certaintie
           ,
           ease
           ,
           and
           cheerfull
           emulation
           to
           the
           scholar
           .
           I
           haue
           therefore
           thought
           it
           my
           dutie
           ,
           after
           my
           vnfallible
           experience
           of
           them
           ,
           rightly
           vsed
           ,
           so
           as
           I
           haue
           plainely
           set
           downe
           the
           maner
           in
           this
           second
           edition
           of
           my
           Grammar
           
           Schoole
           ,
           and
           after
           my
           so
           long
           and
           painfull
           trauell
           ,
           to
           find
           out
           the
           Rule
           most
           certainly
           ,
           with
           the
           best
           ,
           and
           most
           profitable
           vses
           thereof
           ,
           to
           commend
           them
           more
           confidently
           vnto
           all
           our
           Schooles
           ,
           and
           to
           all
           desirous
           to
           recouer
           speedily
           the
           knowledge
           of
           their
           Latin
           tongue
           ,
           or
           to
           increase
           therein
           .
           In
           a
           certaine
           affiance
           ,
           that
           all
           who
           shall
           vse
           them
           aright
           ,
           shall
           see
           a
           rich
           blessing
           ,
           without
           inconuenience
           :
           yet
           lest
           in
           anie
           thing
           I
           should
           be
           thought
           too
           peremptorie
           ,
           I
           intreate
           the
           learned
           first
           to
           make
           proofe
           ,
           then
           to
           iudge
           hereof
           according
           as
           they
           find
           .
        
         
           For
           anie
           further
           apologie
           therefore
           for
           my
           bold
           attempt
           ,
           
           in
           these
           endeuours
           ,
           I
           trust
           that
           some
           few
           of
           the
           reasons
           lightly
           touched
           before
           ,
           may
           be
           defence
           sufficient
           .
           And
           first
           my
           vnfained
           studie
           to
           do
           all
           this
           good
           to
           all
           sorts
           ,
           without
           the
           least
           iniurie
           to
           anie
           one
           ,
           so
           farre
           forth
           as
           I
           shall
           know
           it
           ,
           or
           without
           inuerting
           anie
           approued
           course
           .
           And
           that
           howsoeuer
           I
           haue
           bene
           the
           vnfittest
           of
           manie
           of
           my
           brethren
           ,
           to
           enter
           vpon
           so
           hard
           a
           taske
           ,
           yet
           the
           weaker
           ,
           the
           more
           meete
           haue
           I
           bene
           ,
           to
           haue
           a
           compassionate
           feeling
           of
           the
           wants
           of
           others
           ;
           and
           more
           like
           to
           applie
           my selfe
           to
           the
           capacitie
           of
           the
           meanest
           and
           most
           ignorant
           :
           whereas
           the
           great
           learned
           and
           acute
           do
           oft
           times
           thinke
           ,
           that
           what
           they
           themselues
           vnderstand
           ,
           all
           others
           should
           presently
           conceiue
           ,
           though
           the
           most
           of
           the
           simple
           comprehend
           litle
           or
           nothing
           of
           it
           fully
           ,
           as
           they
           should
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           
           for
           that
           in
           these
           my
           poore
           labours
           ,
           euerie
           one
           may
           haue
           the
           wearie
           trauels
           ,
           and
           comfortable
           experiments
           ,
           of
           manie
           learned
           thus
           gathered
           into
           one
           ,
           and
           brought
           therby
           vnto
           his
           hands
           without
           labor
           or
           charge
           ,
           which
           otherwise
           might
           haue
           cost
           them
           manie
           miles
           trauelling
           ,
           and
           some
           yeares
           triall
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           my selfe
           ,
           and
           yet
           they
           might
           haue
           failed
           of
           manie
           things
           ,
           which
           here
           
           they
           may
           find
           ,
           and
           more
           hereafter
           ,
           as
           God
           shall
           vouchsafe
           moe
           supplies
           vnto
           it
           .
        
         
           Thirdly
           ,
           
           because
           there
           is
           no
           man
           ,
           hauing
           the
           nature
           of
           a
           wise
           father
           ,
           who
           would
           not
           haue
           his
           child
           to
           haue
           some
           learning
           ,
           howsoeuer
           he
           purpose
           to
           employ
           him
           afterward
           ,
           and
           who
           to
           that
           end
           would
           not
           haue
           him
           so
           instructed
           ,
           as
           whereby
           to
           get
           the
           best
           learning
           ,
           in
           the
           shortest
           time
           ,
           and
           with
           the
           least
           seueritie
           ,
           or
           who
           will
           not
           giue
           almost
           double
           ,
           if
           he
           may
           be
           assured
           to
           haue
           his
           child
           so
           trained
           vp
           .
        
         
           Fourthly
           ,
           
           for
           that
           I
           haue
           him
           who
           searcheth
           &
           trieth
           the
           hearts
           ,
           and
           whose
           good
           hand
           hath
           bene
           with
           me
           in
           goodnesse
           ,
           in
           all
           this
           worke
           ,
           to
           beare
           witnesse
           vnto
           my
           conscience
           ,
           that
           I
           haue
           not
           either
           in
           this
           ,
           or
           anie
           other
           my
           trauels
           ,
           aimed
           at
           vaine
           praise
           or
           commendation
           (
           for
           that
           our
           holy
           God
           would
           turne
           into
           shame
           )
           or
           at
           anie
           other
           sinister
           end
           ;
           but
           that
           I
           haue
           striuen
           with
           all
           my
           heart
           ,
           so
           farre
           as
           in
           my
           weaknesse
           I
           haue
           bene
           able
           ,
           to
           aime
           at
           those
           verie
           ends
           alone
           ,
           which
           our
           blessed
           Sauiour
           hath
           taught
           me
           ,
           in
           that
           diuine
           patterne
           of
           heauenly
           prayer
           ,
           which
           hath
           bene
           in
           all
           my
           labours
           my
           principall
           direction
           .
           And
           namely
           ,
           to
           manifest
           my
           dutie
           &
           thankfulnesse
           to
           my
           heauenly
           father
           ,
           like
           as
           for
           all
           other
           his
           mercies
           chiefly
           in
           heauenly
           things
           in
           Christ
           ,
           and
           for
           innumerable
           temporall
           fauors
           ,
           in
           his
           fatherly
           prouidence
           ,
           protection
           and
           direction
           vouchsafed
           vnto
           me
           ;
           
           so
           more
           especially
           for
           those
           three
           great
           deliuerances
           (
           to
           be
           had
           in
           euerlasting
           remembrance
           )
           not
           onely
           of
           our
           Church
           and
           nation
           ,
           
           &
           of
           all
           other
           the
           Churches
           of
           Christ
           with
           them
           ,
           but
           euen
           of
           my selfe
           particularly
           in
           euerie
           one
           of
           them
           .
           And
           this
           I
           haue
           desired
           to
           do
           ,
           by
           seeking
           first
           to
           honour
           him
           ,
           
           and
           secondly
           to
           aduance
           and
           enlarge
           his
           kingdome
           ,
           and
           to
           these
           ends
           searching
           to
           know
           and
           accomplish
           
           all
           his
           holy
           will
           ,
           tending
           thereunto
           ,
           and
           so
           all
           the
           other
           subordinate
           ends
           ,
           as
           he
           hath
           directed
           me
           .
           Thus
           haue
           I
           endeuoured
           to
           rely
           vpon
           that
           his
           gracious
           promise
           ,
           that
           thus
           seeking
           first
           the
           kingdome
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           his
           righteousnesse
           ,
           all
           these
           other
           things
           should
           be
           added
           vnto
           me
           ,
           (
           as
           an
           ouer-measure
           )
           so
           farre
           as
           should
           be
           good
           .
           And
           herein
           indeed
           I
           haue
           felt
           no
           breach
           of
           promise
           from
           his
           Maiestie
           ,
           but
           found
           him
           faithfully
           and
           true
           ;
           yea
           ,
           exceeding
           bountifull
           ,
           aboue
           all
           that
           I
           could
           conceiue
           ,
           in
           all
           things
           wherein
           his
           goodnesse
           hath
           enabled
           me
           so
           to
           seeke
           him
           .
           Vpon
           all
           these
           grounds
           I
           can
           nothing
           doubt
           ,
           but
           through
           the
           mercie
           of
           the
           Lord
           ,
           this
           labour
           being
           intended
           to
           these
           verie
           ends
           ,
           and
           prooued
           to
           be
           answerable
           thereunto
           ,
           without
           inconueniences
           in
           the
           right
           vse
           of
           it
           ,
           as
           my
           assured
           confidence
           is
           ;
           I
           cannot
           but
           fully
           hope
           ,
           that
           it
           will
           in
           due
           time
           be
           most
           welcome
           ,
           and
           acceptable
           to
           all
           ,
           that
           euer
           shal
           make
           triall
           by
           themselues
           or
           others
           .
        
         
           Lastly
           ,
           
           for
           that
           I
           willingly
           submit
           it
           ,
           with
           all
           my
           labours
           ,
           to
           the
           louing
           censure
           of
           all
           the
           learned
           ,
           who
           truly
           loue
           Christs
           Gospell
           ,
           being
           readie
           to
           be
           taught
           of
           the
           meanest
           ,
           who
           shall
           in
           anie
           thing
           shew
           me
           my
           error
           ,
           or
           giue
           me
           clearer
           light
           .
           And
           though
           the
           defects
           should
           still
           be
           verie
           many
           (
           as
           in
           so
           difficult
           a
           worke
           it
           is
           no
           great
           maruell
           ;
           )
           yet
           sith
           I
           am
           most
           desirous
           to
           be
           continually
           reforming
           ,
           euerie
           ingenuous
           well-willer
           vnto
           good
           learning
           ,
           will
           (
           I
           trust
           )
           louingly
           pardon
           them
           ,
           and
           thankfully
           accept
           of
           that
           which
           God
           of
           his
           goodnesse
           hath
           granted
           .
           Thus
           I
           put
           forth
           each
           first
           Copie
           of
           translations
           or
           others
           ,
           
           as
           not
           set
           forth
           ,
           but
           to
           go
           more
           generally
           to
           all
           my
           louing
           friends
           ,
           and
           well-vvishers
           to
           this
           worke
           ,
           to
           craue
           of
           them
           further
           helpe
           ,
           as
           I
           sayd
           before
           .
        
         
           To
           this
           end
           ,
           I
           do
           still
           humbly
           request
           ,
           euerie
           true
           fauourer
           
           of
           good
           learning
           ,
           to
           lay
           to
           his
           hand
           ,
           that
           so
           I
           may
           be
           continually
           learning
           ,
           amending
           ,
           and
           perfecting
           ,
           so
           long
           as
           the
           Lord
           shall
           lengthen
           my
           daies
           .
        
         
           If
           in
           anie
           thing
           ,
           
           I
           haue
           or
           shall
           seeme
           to
           reioice
           ouermuch
           ,
           yet
           consider
           first
           ,
           that
           in
           my
           generall
           work
           ,
           in
           my
           Grammar-Schoole
           ,
           I
           haue
           thought
           the
           forme
           of
           a
           Dialogue
           most
           fit
           ;
           wherein
           more
           libertie
           is
           granted
           to
           incite
           and
           incourage
           others
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           that
           I
           haue
           not
           ,
           nor
           will
           speake
           anie
           more
           ,
           then
           either
           what
           I
           haue
           seene
           experience
           of
           ,
           or
           whereof
           vpon
           good
           grounds
           ,
           I
           am
           fully
           assured
           ,
           and
           which
           I
           take
           my selfe
           bound
           to
           relate
           ,
           onely
           to
           the
           praise
           of
           our
           God
           ,
           &
           the
           good
           of
           others
           ,
           to
           make
           all
           others
           partakers
           of
           the
           comforts
           ,
           which
           to
           that
           end
           he
           hath
           vouchsafed
           vnto
           me
           ,
           following
           so
           neare
           as
           I
           can
           ,
           that
           direction
           mentioned
           before
           ,
           in
           the
           Preface
           before
           our
           common
           Grammar
           .
           Thirdly
           remember
           that
           report
           of
           
             Maister
             Askam
          
           ,
           cōcerning
           
             Maister
             Iohn
             Whitney
          
           ,
           farre
           greater
           then
           all
           mine
           are
           together
           :
           and
           then
           I
           doubt
           not
           (
           these
           things
           being
           rightly
           weighed
           )
           but
           all
           who
           are
           wise
           hearted
           ,
           will
           easily
           beare
           with
           me
           ,
           in
           my
           confident
           reioycing
           ,
           trusting
           moreouer
           that
           God
           will
           verifie
           all
           things
           ,
           to
           euerie
           one
           who
           shall
           duly
           make
           triall
           .
           And
           in
           this
           affiance
           ,
           and
           testimonie
           of
           my
           conscience
           ,
           before
           his
           sacred
           Maiestie
           ,
           I
           wholly
           relie
           my selfe
           .
        
         
           Therefore
           ,
           
           before
           I
           conclude
           ,
           giue
           me
           leaue
           a
           little
           to
           turne
           my
           speech
           to
           you
           ,
           (
           my
           deare
           fellow
           labourers
           ,
           )
           and
           namely
           to
           all
           you
           of
           the
           weaker
           sort
           ,
           for
           whom
           I
           haue
           and
           do
           still
           chiefly
           trauell
           ,
           whose
           hearts
           are
           set
           as
           mine
           to
           do
           all
           the
           good
           you
           can
           ,
           in
           your
           seuerall
           places
           ,
           all
           your
           dayes
           .
           To
           you
           all
           I
           wish
           ,
           that
           as
           we
           haue
           bene
           sometimes
           companions
           ,
           in
           fruitlesse
           toile
           ,
           and
           vexation
           ;
           so
           we
           may
           be
           now
           in
           reioycing
           at
           ,
           and
           admiring
           the
           new
           fruites
           of
           our
           labours
           .
           What
           a
           griefe
           
           may
           this
           iustly
           be
           vnto
           vs
           ,
           
           when
           one
           shall
           come
           ,
           and
           crie
           out
           of
           vs
           ,
           to
           our
           faces
           :
           My
           sonne
           hath
           bene
           vnder
           you
           six
           or
           seuen
           yeares
           ,
           and
           yet
           is
           not
           able
           so
           much
           as
           to
           reade
           English
           well
           ;
           much
           lesse
           to
           construe
           or
           vnderstand
           a
           peece
           of
           Latin
           ,
           or
           to
           write
           true
           Latin
           ,
           or
           to
           speake
           in
           Latin
           in
           any
           tolerable
           sort
           ,
           
           which
           he
           might
           haue
           bene
           well
           able
           to
           haue
           performed
           ,
           if
           that
           you
           had
           taken
           that
           course
           and
           those
           good
           paines
           with
           him
           which
           you
           might
           haue
           done
           ;
           for
           in
           such
           a
           schoole
           others
           much
           yonger
           then
           mine
           are
           able
           to
           do
           it
           .
           Another
           shall
           complaine
           ;
           My
           sonne
           comes
           on
           neuer
           a
           whit
           in
           his
           writing
           .
           Besides
           that
           his
           hand
           is
           such
           ,
           
           that
           it
           can
           hardly
           be
           read
           ;
           he
           also
           writes
           so
           false
           English
           ,
           that
           he
           is
           neither
           fit
           for
           trade
           ,
           nor
           any
           employment
           wherein
           to
           vse
           his
           pen.
           When
           all
           in
           a
           towne
           generally
           ,
           shall
           murmure
           against
           vs
           ,
           in
           this
           or
           the
           like
           manner
           ,
           that
           their
           children
           do
           no
           good
           vnder
           vs
           ,
           but
           lose
           their
           time
           ,
           and
           spend
           their
           friends
           mony
           ,
           being
           brought
           vp
           idlely
           ,
           made
           fit
           for
           nothing
           ,
           and
           therefore
           what
           should
           a
           schoole
           do
           amongst
           them
           ?
           That
           it
           were
           much
           better
           to
           turne
           the
           maintenance
           giuen
           to
           the
           schoole
           ,
           to
           beare
           the
           charges
           of
           the
           towne
           for
           other
           duties
           and
           seruices
           ,
           then
           so
           vnprofitably
           to
           employ
           it
           .
        
         
           Moreouer
           how
           must
           this
           needs
           trouble
           vs
           ,
           
           when
           manie
           shall
           crie
           out
           of
           our
           seueritie
           :
           some
           shall
           wish
           ,
           I
           would
           my
           child
           had
           neuer
           knowne
           him
           .
           If
           he
           had
           not
           dealt
           so
           cruelly
           with
           my
           child
           ,
           he
           had
           bene
           a
           scholar
           ,
           wheras
           now
           he
           is
           vndone
           .
           Or
           when
           our
           scholars
           coming
           to
           mans
           estate
           ,
           shall
           curse
           vs
           ,
           for
           that
           by
           our
           blowes
           they
           were
           made
           dunses
           or
           deafe
           (
           though
           this
           oftentimes
           vniustly
           )
           or
           to
           hate
           all
           learning
           .
           
           Or
           shall
           generally
           bewaile
           the
           losse
           of
           their
           time
           vnder
           vs
           ,
           complaining
           as
           the
           vsuall
           maner
           is
           ,
           My
           Maister
           neuer
           taught
           me
           anie
           vnderstanding
           ,
           
           or
           right
           vse
           of
           good
           learning
           ,
           that
           though
           I
           was
           with
           sundrie
           ,
           yet
           I
           was
           neuer
           the
           better
           .
           I
           got
           more
           sence
           ,
           and
           saw
           more
           light
           for
           the
           vse
           and
           excellency
           of
           learning
           ,
           and
           also
           felt
           more
           sweetnesse
           therein
           ,
           in
           one
           halfe
           yeare
           in
           the
           end
           ,
           with
           one
           who
           directed
           me
           in
           a
           better
           order
           ,
           then
           in
           all
           my
           time
           ,
           with
           all
           others
           .
           The
           rest
           deceiued
           my
           parents
           ,
           and
           were
           my
           vndoing
           .
           Or
           when
           they
           shall
           thus
           complaine
           :
           Our
           Maister
           had
           not
           anie
           care
           of
           our
           gouernment
           and
           manners
           .
           
           He
           neuer
           taught
           vs
           the
           feare
           of
           the
           Lord
           ,
           nor
           made
           the
           least
           conscience
           to
           plant
           anie
           Religion
           or
           grace
           in
           vs.
           
        
         
           Finally
           ,
           
           what
           a
           terrour
           shall
           this
           be
           vnto
           vs
           ,
           and
           what
           a
           wounding
           to
           our
           consciences
           ,
           when
           we
           shall
           but
           thinke
           ,
           how
           the
           Lord
           and
           all
           good
           men
           ,
           may
           most
           iustly
           lay
           this
           vnto
           our
           charge
           ,
           that
           the
           cause
           hath
           bene
           chiefely
           in
           vs
           ,
           that
           Gods
           religion
           ,
           hath
           not
           thriuen
           any
           better
           in
           our
           Land
           ,
           in
           so
           long
           a
           time
           ;
           but
           that
           Popery
           ,
           ignorance
           ,
           Atheisme
           ,
           and
           all
           irreligiousnesse
           ,
           haue
           farre
           more
           growne
           vp
           in
           many
           places
           ?
           If
           we
           had
           bene
           as
           carefull
           to
           season
           our
           youth
           ,
           in
           the
           truth
           of
           Christ
           ,
           and
           to
           settle
           them
           in
           the
           grounds
           of
           his
           holy
           religion
           ,
           truly
           professed
           amongst
           vs
           ,
           to
           their
           saluation
           ,
           as
           the
           Popish
           schoolemaisters
           are
           to
           corrupt
           them
           with
           Idolatry
           ,
           and
           superstition
           ,
           vnto
           perdition
           ,
           the
           knowledge
           and
           loue
           of
           Gods
           true
           worship
           ,
           and
           pietie
           ,
           had
           flourished
           amongst
           vs
           ,
           euery
           where
           long
           ago
           ,
           all
           Popery
           and
           Atheisme
           rooted
           out
           .
           And
           what
           answer
           can
           we
           thinke
           to
           make
           to
           God
           ,
           for
           his
           religion
           ,
           and
           people
           ,
           for
           so
           many
           who
           haue
           bene
           lost
           ,
           chiefly
           through
           our
           lacke
           of
           care
           ?
           How
           should
           these
           things
           touch
           euery
           one
           of
           vs
           ,
           euen
           to
           the
           very
           hearts
           ,
           and
           cause
           vs
           to
           bethinke
           our selues
           at
           length
           ,
           of
           this
           our
           weighty
           function
           ,
           to
           the
           end
           to
           take
           away
           all
           this
           reproch
           ,
           and
           to
           begin
           to
           recouer
           the
           
           credit
           of
           our
           worthy
           profession
           .
        
         
           You
           know
           well
           ,
           
           that
           we
           are
           they
           to
           whose
           charge
           that
           rich
           treasure
           ,
           both
           of
           Church
           and
           Cōmon
           wealth
           is
           committed
           in
           trust
           ,
           (
           as
           was
           said
           )
           and
           the
           hope
           of
           a
           more
           happy
           age
           hereafter
           yet
           to
           come
           .
           We
           are
           they
           who
           helpe
           either
           to
           make
           or
           marre
           all
           ;
           for
           that
           all
           the
           flower
           of
           our
           Nation
           ,
           and
           those
           who
           become
           the
           leaders
           of
           all
           the
           rest
           ,
           are
           committed
           to
           our
           education
           ,
           and
           instruction
           :
           that
           if
           we
           bring
           them
           vp
           aright
           ,
           there
           is
           great
           hope
           ,
           that
           they
           shall
           prooue
           goodly
           lights
           ,
           and
           marks
           to
           all
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           Land
           ,
           especially
           ,
           to
           the
           townes
           and
           countries
           where
           they
           are
           ;
           and
           cleane
           contrarily
           ,
           most
           wofull
           ensamples
           (
           as
           are
           euery
           where
           to
           be
           seene
           )
           if
           they
           be
           spoiled
           through
           vs
           ,
           or
           for
           lacke
           of
           our
           better
           care
           .
           So
           that
           we
           must
           needs
           do
           the
           greatest
           good
           or
           the
           greatest
           euill
           .
           As
           we
           are
           before
           them
           ,
           so
           we
           may
           expect
           ,
           that
           they
           shall
           prooue
           for
           the
           most
           part
           after
           vs.
           We
           are
           therefore
           the
           men
           ,
           vpon
           whom
           the
           flourishing
           of
           this
           our
           Canaan
           ,
           doth
           very
           much
           depend
           .
           We
           cannot
           then
           but
           know
           ,
           that
           as
           our
           worke
           aud
           charge
           are
           so
           weighty
           ,
           and
           in
           course
           of
           education
           next
           vnto
           the
           worke
           and
           charge
           of
           the
           holy
           Ministery
           ,
           which
           we
           also
           are
           to
           helpe
           to
           furnish
           :
           so
           our
           account
           must
           be
           according
           to
           that
           which
           our
           God
           hath
           trusted
           vs
           withall
           ,
           and
           our
           reward
           answerable
           ;
           dreadfull
           ,
           if
           we
           haue
           bene
           negligent
           ;
           glorious
           ,
           if
           we
           haue
           bene
           faithfull
           .
        
         
           We
           cannot
           be
           ignorant
           ,
           how
           our
           enemies
           the
           Iesuits
           ,
           not
           onely
           in
           their
           Semina●ies
           ,
           but
           also
           in
           their
           lesser
           schooles
           ,
           do
           bend
           their
           wits
           ,
           to
           go
           beyond
           vs
           in
           this
           verie
           kind
           .
           Giue
           me
           leaue
           to
           put
           you
           in
           mind
           of
           that
           which
           was
           written
           vnto
           me
           ,
           from
           an
           ancient
           acquaintance
           in
           the
           Vniuersitie
           ,
           now
           sundrie
           yeares
           ago
           ,
           and
           which
           I
           do
           gladly
           acknowledge
           ,
           to
           the
           praise
           of
           God
           ,
           that
           it
           hath
           
           from
           the
           first
           relation
           put
           more
           life
           vnto
           me
           in
           this
           businesse
           .
           The
           summe
           of
           it
           was
           this
           .
        
         
           The
           Iesuites
           ,
           
           the
           Popish
           schoolemaisters
           beyond
           the
           seas
           ,
           do
           combine
           themselues
           together
           ,
           and
           all
           ,
           or
           at
           least
           manie
           schooles
           do
           reade
           the
           same
           bookes
           at
           one
           time
           ,
           and
           the
           same
           places
           ,
           and
           do
           change
           euery
           quarter
           ,
           and
           set
           vpon
           the
           schoole
           dores
           ,
           the
           Authors
           ,
           place
           ,
           lectures
           ,
           exercises
           ,
           euerie
           quarter
           ,
           newly
           printed
           ,
           and
           for
           this
           they
           haue
           great
           suite
           made
           vnto
           them
           by
           the
           Printers
           .
           This
           haue
           I
           lately
           learned
           of
           certaine
           whom
           I
           vsed
           beyond
           the
           seas
           to
           this
           end
           .
           
             Thus
             farre
             my
             louing
             friend
             .
             Whether
             this
             report
             was
             true
             in
             each
             particular
             ,
             I
             cannot
             certainly
             affirme
             ,
             yet
             for
             the
             generall
             ,
             we
             all
             who
             vnderstand
             anie
             thing
             ,
             do
             know
             that
             it
             is
             most
             certaine
             .
          
        
         
           Now
           who
           are
           these
           who
           thus
           combine
           ?
           are
           they
           not
           the
           principall
           plotters
           of
           the
           ruine
           of
           all
           the
           Churches
           of
           Christ
           ,
           and
           of
           Common-wealths
           ,
           as
           they
           are
           cried
           out
           of
           ,
           euen
           in
           the
           Popish
           countries
           themselues
           ;
           the
           arch
           enemies
           of
           Christ
           and
           his
           Gospell
           ,
           and
           the
           chiefe
           vpholders
           of
           the
           throne
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           to
           make
           him
           king
           of
           kings
           ,
           and
           Lord
           of
           Lords
           .
           And
           what
           is
           their
           purpose
           in
           seeking
           out
           the
           most
           excellent
           courses
           of
           getting
           most
           speedily
           all
           good
           learning
           as
           they
           would
           pretend
           ?
           Surely
           their
           purpose
           is
           nothing
           else
           ,
           as
           all
           the
           world
           may
           plainely
           see
           ,
           but
           by
           that
           their
           learning
           to
           ou●-countenance
           the
           heauēly
           learning
           ,
           the
           sacred
           truth
           of
           that
           euerlasting
           Gospell
           ,
           and
           all
           the
           learned
           ,
           who
           professe
           Christ
           Iesus
           throughout
           the
           earth
           :
           to
           gaine
           all
           the
           flowre
           of
           the
           Nobility
           ,
           and
           Gentrie
           ,
           yea
           of
           all
           the
           youth
           in
           all
           places
           where
           they
           come
           ,
           to
           bewitch
           all
           with
           an
           opinion
           of
           their
           learning
           ,
           the
           more
           easily
           when
           their
           time
           serues
           to
           cut
           the
           throats
           of
           all
           ,
           who
           truly
           and
           sincerely
           professe
           Christs
           Gospell
           ,
           and
           to
           possesse
           their
           places
           .
           Yea
           if
           it
           
           were
           in
           their
           power
           ,
           or
           possible
           ,
           to
           destroy
           all
           the
           Churches
           of
           Christ
           ,
           to
           extinguish
           vtterly
           all
           true
           learning
           ,
           to
           bring
           in
           againe
           all
           their
           old
           learning
           ,
           as
           (
           they
           call
           it
           )
           their
           palpable
           delusions
           ,
           and
           abhominable
           Idolatry
           .
           
           We
           all
           saw
           ,
           how
           nea●e
           we
           were
           to
           be
           consumed
           by
           their
           fornace
           .
           We
           with
           our
           royall
           King
           ,
           our
           Prince
           ,
           our
           Nobles
           ,
           and
           Rulers
           ,
           the
           Church
           of
           Christ
           ,
           with
           the
           glory
           thereof
           .
           Now
           our
           God
           hauing
           so
           miraculously
           plucked
           vs
           out
           ,
           and
           we
           all
           being
           in
           a
           speciall
           manner
           (
           next
           vnto
           our
           Gracious
           Soueraigne
           ,
           and
           his
           royall
           Progeny
           ,
           together
           with
           these
           our
           Nobles
           and
           Rulers
           ,
           the
           holy
           ministery
           and
           noted
           professors
           )
           designed
           in
           their
           hearts
           ,
           as
           flesh
           for
           their
           caldron
           ;
           let
           vs
           shew
           our selues
           thankfull
           ,
           euery
           one
           in
           our
           places
           and
           callings
           :
           and
           in
           token
           of
           our
           thankfulnesse
           ,
           
           to
           our
           most
           mercifull
           and
           blessed
           God
           (
           whose
           name
           is
           for
           this
           aboue
           all
           other
           outward
           deliuerances
           ,
           to
           be
           extolled
           for
           euermore
           ;
           )
           first
           for
           our
           liues
           ,
           and
           then
           for
           our
           Religion
           the
           life
           of
           our
           liues
           ;
           let
           vs
           all
           be
           prouoked
           to
           bend
           our
           studies
           ,
           and
           euen
           to
           spend
           and
           end
           our
           liues
           ,
           for
           our
           Christ
           ,
           and
           for
           our
           dread
           Soueraigne
           ,
           vnder
           him
           .
           By
           whose
           hand
           ●e
           so
           (
           euen
           miraculously
           )
           deliuered
           vs
           ,
           the
           second
           time
           ,
           like
           as
           formerly
           he
           had
           in
           a
           most
           wonderfull
           manner
           ,
           at
           his
           first
           comming
           to
           the
           Regall
           Crowne
           ,
           and
           his
           entring
           in
           amongst
           vs
           ;
           whereby
           all
           their
           long
           hopes
           ,
           and
           bloudie
           designes
           against
           vs
           were
           dashed
           in
           a
           moment
           ,
           and
           that
           heauenly
           light
           continued
           to
           vs
           ,
           and
           to
           our
           posteritie
           (
           I
           trust
           till
           Christ
           shall
           come
           )
           which
           they
           certainly
           accounted
           at
           both
           those
           times
           ,
           to
           haue
           put
           out
           for
           euer
           .
        
         
           Let
           vs
           now
           contrariwise
           stirre
           vp
           our selues
           ,
           more
           then
           euer
           heretofore
           ,
           that
           the
           light
           of
           all
           good
           knowledge
           may
           breake
           forth
           ,
           and
           be
           as
           the
           morning
           brightnesse
           
           before
           the
           Sunne
           rising
           ,
           to
           prepare
           the
           way
           to
           that
           glorious
           appearing
           ,
           and
           kingdome
           ,
           when
           we
           with
           all
           the
           children
           of
           the
           light
           shall
           shine
           eternally
           in
           the
           heauens
           :
           and
           when
           all
           those
           who
           haue
           sought
           deuices
           to
           bring
           in
           againe
           darknesse
           vpon
           all
           ,
           or
           but
           to
           hinder
           the
           glorious
           light
           of
           truth
           ,
           shall
           without
           their
           vnfained
           repentance
           liue
           perpetually
           in
           their
           place
           of
           vtter
           darknesse
           .
           
           Oh
           that
           these
           enemies
           could
           thinke
           of
           this
           ,
           and
           be
           warned
           in
           time
           ,
           to
           turne
           their
           thoughts
           another
           way
           ,
           euen
           for
           the
           King
           of
           Kings
           ,
           that
           they
           might
           haue
           boldnesse
           at
           his
           appearing
           .
           But
           to
           leaue
           them
           ,
           praying
           for
           them
           ,
           that
           so
           many
           of
           them
           as
           belong
           to
           Gods
           eternall
           election
           ,
           may
           haue
           their
           eyes
           open
           to
           see
           their
           miserie
           ,
           and
           be
           conuerted
           and
           saued
           ;
           and
           to
           returne
           to
           our selues
           .
           There
           is
           no
           cause
           at
           all
           for
           vs
           ,
           why
           we
           should
           feare
           or
           doubt
           of
           a
           glorious
           triumph
           and
           crowne
           hereby
           ;
           if
           that
           we
           will
           but
           cheerfully
           ioyne
           hearts
           and
           hands
           ;
           prouoked
           by
           the
           combinations
           of
           these
           our
           bloud-thirtie
           aduersaries
           ,
           and
           all
           sticke
           close
           vnto
           our
           Lord
           and
           Sauiour
           ,
           our
           Captaine
           and
           teacher
           .
           With
           them
           is
           but
           an
           arme
           of
           flesh
           ,
           the
           spirit
           of
           man
           ,
           of
           Sathan
           ,
           and
           Antichrist
           :
           
           but
           with
           vs
           our
           Christ
           ,
           commanding
           and
           assuring
           vs.
           He
           who
           is
           King
           of
           Kings
           and
           Lord
           of
           Lo●ds
           .
           With
           vs
           is
           he
           who
           must
           reigne
           ,
           vntill
           he
           haue
           vtterly
           ouerthrowne
           ,
           
           and
           abolished
           that
           man
           of
           sinne
           ,
           (
           though
           now
           exalting
           himselfe
           aboue
           all
           that
           is
           called
           God
           ,
           or
           worshipped
           )
           and
           all
           those
           his
           souldiers
           with
           him
           .
           He
           will
           be
           with
           vs
           ,
           and
           guide
           vs
           ,
           he
           will
           direct
           and
           blesse
           vs.
           He
           can
           make
           the
           meanest
           of
           his
           to
           do
           more
           seruice
           for
           the
           vphoding
           and
           furthering
           of
           his
           owne
           kingdome
           ,
           
           which
           must
           come
           with
           power
           and
           glory
           ,
           and
           endure
           for
           euer
           ;
           then
           all
           their
           combinations
           shall
           do
           to
           the
           contrary
           .
           And
           much
           more
           when
           we
           shall
           louingly
           
           and
           faithfully
           ,
           as
           of
           one
           heart
           and
           soule
           ,
           vnite
           all
           our
           forces
           ,
           and
           labours
           in
           one
           ,
           to
           this
           so
           happy
           and
           blessed
           a
           worke
           ,
           wherein
           we
           are
           sure
           to
           preuaile
           ,
           if
           we
           will
           but
           go
           on
           manfully
           ,
           and
           stand
           fast
           to
           our
           Captaine
           ,
           and
           great
           Commander
           .
           The
           victorie
           is
           his
           ,
           he
           hath
           gotten
           it
           already
           ;
           
           he
           rideth
           on
           the
           white
           horse
           ,
           conquering
           till
           he
           haue
           accomplished
           all
           his
           worke
           .
        
         
           If
           we
           of
           the
           weaker
           so
           it
           can
           for
           the
           presen●
           ,
           
           but
           attaine
           neare
           vnto
           those
           things
           mentioned
           in
           the
           Contents
           of
           the
           Grammar
           Schoole
           ,
           viz.
           what
           may
           be
           done
           for
           sp●edy
           &
           certaine
           attaining
           to
           learning
           in
           schooles
           ,
           which
           are
           also
           hereunto
           adioyned
           ;
           our
           labour
           shal
           be
           most
           pleasing
           to
           our
           God
           ,
           profitable
           to
           all
           ,
           sweete
           and
           comfortable
           to
           our
           owne
           hearts
           .
           Euen
           we
           shall
           helpe
           to
           restore
           learning
           againe
           to
           her
           ancient
           reputation
           and
           honour
           ,
           and
           ●●ee
           our selues
           from
           all
           reproch
           ,
           being
           able
           to
           liue
           with
           credit
           in
           our
           places
           .
           And
           that
           we
           may
           come
           vnto
           them
           all
           ,
           
           make
           ye
           no
           doubt
           .
           My selfe
           and
           many
           others
           ,
           haue
           seene
           so
           much
           experience
           ,
           in
           as
           weake
           meanes
           ,
           as
           most
           of
           vs
           haue
           ,
           as
           whereby
           to
           assure
           vs
           ,
           that
           by
           our
           constant
           labour
           and
           diligence
           ,
           but
           in
           the
           courses
           set
           downe
           in
           the
           Grammar-schoole
           ,
           we
           shall
           through
           the
           helpe
           of
           our
           good
           God
           finde
           them
           in
           such
           sort
           ,
           〈…〉
        
         
           Let
           vs
           therefore
           double
           our
           diligence
           ,
           
           and
           〈…〉
           we
           have
           made
           triall
           ,
           in
           these
           ,
           or
           in
           better
           ,
           item
           God
           haue
           or
           shall
           vouchsa●e
           them
           vnto
           vs.
           You
           see
           how
           much
           through
           his
           mercifull
           goodnesse
           I
           haue
           〈◊〉
           herein
           (
           though
           the
           vnablest
           of
           very
           〈◊〉
           )
           and
           how
           farre
           the
           worke
           is
           proceeded
           in
           ;
           to
           the
           end
           hereby
           to
           prouoke
           and
           encourage
           you
           .
           You
           who
           haue
           not
           better
           ,
           proue
           these
           ,
           which
           God
           hereby
           offereth
           vnto
           
           you
           ;
           or
           at
           least
           so
           many
           of
           them
           ,
           as
           you
           shall
           most
           like
           of
           ,
           and
           as
           your
           leisure
           and
           opportunitie
           well
           serue
           ;
           yet
           not
           ouerloading
           your selues
           or
           your
           children
           .
           That
           we
           may
           approue
           ,
           what
           is
           best
           ,
           reforme
           what
           is
           amisse
           ,
           and
           draw
           euery
           thing
           still
           more
           shortly
           ,
           euer
           receiuing
           better
           ,
           as
           his
           goodnesse
           shall
           affoord
           them
           .
           And
           so
           in
           time
           by
           our
           ioynt
           consent
           ,
           we
           may
           confirme
           all
           the
           surest
           ,
           both
           vnto
           our selues
           ,
           and
           to
           all
           other
           whosoeuer
           shall
           succeed
           .
           You
           that
           haue
           more
           excellent
           in
           any
           kinde
           ,
           communicate
           them
           with
           vs
           ,
           as
           we
           haue
           presumed
           herein
           ,
           in
           duty
           to
           tender
           thus
           much
           vnto
           you
           .
        
         
           But
           let
           none
           of
           vs
           be
           discouraged
           though
           we
           do
           not
           find
           our
           desires
           at
           the
           first
           ;
           
           set
           to
           it
           cheerfully
           ,
           and
           in
           due
           time
           our
           eyes
           shall
           behold
           it
           .
        
         
           Thus
           also
           our
           brethren
           ,
           who
           are
           of
           the
           most
           excellent
           gifts
           ,
           I
           meane
           the
           Maisters
           of
           all
           the
           principall
           schooles
           of
           our
           nation
           ,
           and
           all
           other
           sound
           hearted
           fauourers
           of
           good
           learning
           ,
           seeing
           our
           louing
           contention
           ,
           shal
           be
           enforced
           to
           ioyne
           hearts
           ,
           and
           hands
           ,
           and
           to
           affoord
           vs
           likewise
           their
           vttermost
           helpe
           and
           countenance
           ;
           which
           ,
           in
           the
           name
           of
           our
           Lord
           Iesus
           Christ
           ,
           and
           by
           our
           appearing
           before
           him
           ,
           as
           they
           tender
           his
           glory
           ,
           the
           good
           of
           our
           Church
           &
           their
           natiue
           countrey
           ,
           I
           againe
           humbly
           intreat
           at
           their
           hands
           :
           especially
           their
           directions
           for
           the
           best
           performance
           of
           these
           chiefest
           and
           most
           necessarie
           excercises
           mentioned
           ,
           and
           whatsoeuer
           else
           they
           find
           vs
           too
           short
           in
           ,
           for
           the
           full
           adorning
           of
           the
           Grammar
           Schoole
           .
           By
           this
           means
           ,
           shall
           the
           worke
           of
           God
           prosper
           in
           our
           hands
           ,
           going
           forward
           happily
           ,
           that
           we
           shall
           vndoubtedly
           find
           the
           desires
           of
           our
           s●●les
           ,
           and
           wherein
           the
           excellency
           of
           the
           speedy
           attaining
           to
           all
           good
           learning
           doth
           consist
           ,
           to
           the
           endlesse
           glory
           of
           our
           most
           holy
           and
           onely
           wise
           God
           ,
           the
           lasting
           
           honour
           of
           our
           Nation
           ,
           &
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           Christ
           ,
           the
           safe
           preseruation
           of
           our
           liues
           and
           religion
           ,
           with
           the
           happinesse
           of
           posteritie
           ,
           euen
           to
           match
           &
           go
           beyond
           our
           aduersaries
           .
           Thus
           finally
           all
           true
           learning
           shall
           be
           had
           in
           lasting
           honour
           ,
           and
           all
           vnfained
           fauourers
           and
           furtherers
           of
           the
           same
           ,
           shall
           triumph
           eternally
           .
           Which
           that
           it
           may
           ,
           let
           me
           onely
           adjoyne
           that
           worthy
           incouragement
           ,
           wherewith
           
             Christophorus
             Hegendorphinus
          
           incited
           one
           of
           his
           scholars
           ,
           now
           many
           yeares
           ago
           .
           
        
         
           
             Tu
             verò
             in
             liter
             as
             &
             Graecas
             &
             Latinas
             ,
             vt
             soles
             gnauiter
             incumbe
             .
             Nec
             te
             deterreat
             ,
             quod
             in
             hoc
             seculo
             ,
             tam
             literae
             quam
             literati
             contemptui
             sint
             ;
             redibit
             ,
             crede
             mihi
             ,
             redibit
             suus
             honor
             ,
             &
             literis
             &
             literatis
             :
             nam
             omnium
             rerum
             vicissitudo
             est
             .
          
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           
             inquit
             Sophocles
          
           .
           But
           applie
           you
           your selfe
           cheerfully
           vnto
           Greeke
           and
           Latin
           studies
           ,
           as
           you
           are
           wont
           .
           Neither
           let
           this
           terrifie
           you
           ,
           that
           in
           this
           age
           ,
           as
           well
           learning
           as
           learned
           men
           are
           in
           such
           contempt
           .
           There
           will
           returne
           (
           beleeue
           me
           )
           there
           will
           returne
           ,
           their
           due
           honour
           ,
           both
           to
           learning
           and
           to
           learned
           men
           :
           for
           there
           is
           an
           intercourse
           of
           all
           things
           .
           For
           vnto
           them
           that
           shall
           liue
           in
           the
           last
           age
           ,
           pleasant
           things
           shall
           be
           made
           bitter
           ,
           and
           yet
           pleasant
           and
           beloued
           afterwards
           againe
           ,
           as
           saith
           Sophocles
           that
           ancient
           Greeke
           Poet.
           
        
         
           Thus
           farre
           Hegendorphinus
           ,
           as
           foretelling
           (
           truly
           I
           trust
           )
           the
           glorie
           of
           this
           last
           succeeding
           age
           ,
           whereto
           let
           all
           heartie
           friends
           of
           good
           learning
           euer
           say
           ,
           Amen
           .
        
         
           
           
             CONTENTS
             IN
             GENERALL
             OF
             SVCH
             THINGS
             AS
             may
             (
             by
             Gods
             blessing
             )
             be
             easily
             effected
             in
             our
             ordinarie
             Grammar
             schooles
             ▪
          
           
             1.
             
             TO
             teach
             schol●rs
             how
             to
             be
             able
             to
             reade
             well
             ,
             and
             write
             true
             or
             orthographie
             in
             a
             short
             time
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             To
             make
             them
             ready
             ,
             in
             all
             points
             of
             their
             Accidence
             and
             Grammar
             ,
             to
             answer
             anie
             necessarie
             question
             therein
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             To
             〈◊〉
             without
             booke
             all
             the
             vsuall
             and
             necessarie
             Rules
             ,
             to
             〈◊〉
             their
             Grammar
             rules
             ;
             to
             giue
             the
             meaning
             ,
             vse
             ,
             and
             order
             of
             the
             rules
             ,
             to
             shew
             the
             examples
             ,
             and
             to
             apply
             them
             :
             which
             being
             well
             performed
             ,
             will
             make
             all
             other
             learning
             easie
             and
             pleasant
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             In
             the
             seuerall
             〈…〉
             and
             Authors
             to
             construe
             truly
             ,
             and
             in
             proprietie
             of
             wor●s
             and
             sense
             ,
             and
             also
             in
             pure
             phrase
             ;
             to
             parse
             of
             themselues
             ,
             and
             to
             giue
             a
             right
             reason
             of
             euerie
             word
             ,
             why
             it
             must
             be
             so
             and
             not
             otherwise
             ;
             and
             to
             deliuer
             the
             English
             of
             the
             Lectures
             perfectly
             out
             of
             the
             Latine
             .
          
           
             5.
             
             Out
             of
             an
             English
             Grammaticall
             translation
             of
             their
             Authors
             ,
             to
             make
             and
             to
             construe
             anie
             part
             of
             the
             Latine
             which
             they
             haue
             learned
             ,
             or
             do
             presently
             learne
             ;
             to
             proue
             that
             it
             must
             be
             so
             ,
             and
             so
             to
             reade
             the
             Latine
             out
             of
             the
             English
             ,
             first
             in
             the
             plaine
             Grammaticall
             order
             ;
             after
             as
             the
             wo●ds
             are
             placed
             in
             the
             Author
             ,
             or
             in
             other
             good
             composition
             .
             Also
             to
             p●rse
             in
             Latine
             ,
             looking
             onely
             vpon
             the
             translation
             ;
             and
             to
             all
             their
             Poets
             which
             they
             so
             learne
             :
             to
             do
             all
             this
             without
             booke
             ,
             which
             is
             farre
             the
             surest
             ,
             viz.
             to
             repeate
             ,
             construe
             ,
             and
             parse
             with
             their
             booke
             vnder
             their
             arme
             .
          
           
           
             6.
             
             To
             take
             their
             Lectures
             of
             themselues
             ,
             except
             in
             the
             verie
             lowest
             Formes
             ,
             and
             first
             entrers
             into
             construction
             ;
             or
             to
             do
             it
             with
             verie
             little
             helpe
             ,
             in
             some
             more
             difficult
             things
             .
          
           
             7.
             
             To
             enter
             surely
             in
             making
             Latine
             ,
             without
             danger
             of
             making
             false
             Latine
             ,
             or
             vsing
             anie
             barbarous
             phrase
             .
          
           
             8.
             
             To
             〈◊〉
             true
             Latine
             ,
             and
             pure
             Tullies
             phrase
             ,
             and
             to
             proue
             it
             to
             be
             true
             and
             pure
             .
          
           
             9.
             
             To
             〈…〉
             ,
             imitating
             Tully
             and
             the
             best
             A●thors
             in
             that
             kind
             ,
             〈◊〉
             and
             pithie
             ,
             in
             pure
             Latine
             ,
             and
             familiar
             .
          
           
             10.
             
             To
             translate
             into
             English
             ,
             according
             to
             proprietie
             both
             of
             words
             and
             sense
             ▪
             and
             out
             of
             the
             English
             to
             reade
             the
             Latine
             againe
             ,
             to
             proue
             it
             ,
             and
             giue
             a
             reason
             of
             euerie
             thing
             .
          
           
             11.
             
             To
             take
             a
             peece
             of
             Tully
             ,
             or
             of
             anie
             other
             familiar
             easie
             Authour
             ,
             Grammatically
             translated
             ,
             and
             in
             proprietie
             of
             words
             ,
             and
             to
             turne
             or
             reade
             the
             same
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             Translation
             into
             good
             Latine
             ,
             and
             verie
             neere
             vnto
             the
             words
             of
             the
             Author
             ;
             so
             as
             in
             most
             ,
             you
             shall
             hardly
             discerne
             ,
             whether
             it
             be
             the
             Authors
             Latine
             or
             the
             Scholars
             .
          
           
             12.
             
             To
             correct
             their
             faults
             of
             themsel●es
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             but
             noted
             out
             vnto
             them
             ,
             or
             a
             question
             is
             asked
             of
             them
             .
          
           
             13.
             
             To
             be
             able
             in
             each
             Forme
             (
             at
             anie
             time
             whensoeuer
             they
             shall
             be
             apposed
             of
             a
             sodaine
             ,
             in
             any
             part
             of
             their
             Authors
             ,
             which
             they
             haue
             lately
             learned
             )
             to
             construe
             ,
             parse
             ,
             reade
             into
             English
             ,
             and
             in
             those
             Authors
             ,
             whereof
             they
             haue
             translations
             ;
             forth
             of
             the
             translation
             ,
             to
             construe
             and
             to
             reade
             into
             the
             Latine
             of
             their
             Author
             .
             First
             into
             the
             naturall
             order
             ,
             then
             into
             the
             order
             of
             the
             Author
             ,
             or
             neare
             vnto
             it
             ,
             and
             in
             their
             Poëts
             to
             do
             all
             this
             without
             booke
             ,
             as
             was
             sayd
             before
             ,
             and
             so
             to
             giue
             an
             account
             ,
             at
             each
             quarters
             ●nd
             ,
             what
             they
             haue
             learned
             in
             that
             quarter
             ;
             so
             from
             quarter
             to
             quarter
             to
             do
             the
             like
             .
          
           
           
             14.
             
             In
             
               Virgil
               ,
               Horace
            
             ,
             and
             other
             the
             chiefe
             and
             most
             approued
             Schoole
             Authors
             in
             Poëtrie
             and
             Prose
             ,
             to
             resolue
             any
             peece
             ,
             for
             all
             these
             points
             of
             learning
             ,
             and
             to
             do
             it
             in
             good
             Latine
             :
             
               
                 In
              
               
                 Construing
                 ,
                 to
                 giue
                 propriety
                 of
                 words
                 and
                 sense
                 ,
                 and
                 also
                 to
                 expound
                 in
                 good
                 phrase
                 .
              
               
                 Scanning
                 the
                 Verses
                 ,
                 and
                 giuing
                 a
                 reason
                 thereof
                 .
              
               
                 Shewing
                 the
                 difficulties
                 of
                 Grammar
                 .
              
               
                 Obseruing
                 the
                 Elegances
                 of
                 Rhetoricke
                 in
                 Tropes
                 and
                 Figures
                 .
              
               
                 Noting
                 Phrases
                 and
                 Epithets
                 ,
                 with
                 other
                 principall
                 obseruations
                 .
              
            
          
           
             15.
             
             So
             to
             reade
             ouer
             so
             much
             of
             the
             chiefe
             Latine
             Poëts
             ,
             as
             
               Virgil
               ,
               Horace
            
             ,
             &c.
             and
             of
             other
             the
             best
             Authors
             ,
             as
             shall
             be
             thought
             necessary
             ,
             by
             that
             time
             ,
             that
             by
             reason
             of
             their
             yeares
             they
             be
             in
             any
             measure
             thought
             fit
             ,
             for
             their
             discretion
             ,
             to
             go
             vnto
             the
             Vniuersity
             ;
             and
             to
             be
             able
             to
             go
             thorough
             the
             rest
             of
             themselues
             ,
             by
             ordinary
             helpes
             .
          
           
             16.
             
             In
             Greeke
             to
             take
             their
             Lectures
             of
             themselues
             ,
             to
             construe
             perfectly
             ,
             and
             parse
             as
             in
             the
             Latine
             ;
             to
             reade
             the
             Greeke
             backe
             againe
             ,
             out
             of
             a
             translation
             ,
             Latine
             ,
             or
             English
             ;
             also
             to
             construe
             ,
             parse
             ,
             and
             to
             prooue
             it
             out
             of
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             17.
             
             In
             the
             Hebrew
             to
             be
             able
             to
             construe
             perfectly
             ,
             and
             to
             resolue
             so
             farre
             as
             is
             necessary
             for
             the
             Grammar-schoole
             ;
             and
             to
             reade
             the
             Hebrew
             also
             out
             of
             the
             translation
             ;
             which
             practise
             of
             daily
             reading
             somewhat
             out
             of
             the
             translations
             into
             the
             Originals
             ,
             must
             needs
             make
             them
             ,
             both
             very
             cunning
             in
             the
             Tongues
             ,
             and
             also
             perfect
             in
             the
             Texts
             of
             the
             Originals
             themselues
             ,
             if
             it
             be
             obserued
             constantly
             ;
             like
             as
             it
             is
             in
             the
             daily
             reading
             Latine
             out
             of
             the
             translation
             .
          
           
             18.
             
             To
             answer
             most
             of
             the
             difficulties
             in
             all
             classicall
             Schoole-Authors
             ;
             as
             in
             
               Terence
               ,
               Virgil
               ,
               Horace
               ,
               Persius
               ,
               Iuvenal
               .
            
          
           
           
             19.
             
             To
             oppose
             scholar-like
             in
             Latine
             of
             any
             Grammar
             question
             necessary
             ,
             in
             a
             good
             forme
             of
             words
             ;
             both
             what
             may
             be
             objected
             against
             Lillies
             rules
             ,
             and
             how
             to
             defend
             them
             .
          
           
             20.
             
             To
             write
             Theames
             full
             of
             good
             matter
             ,
             in
             pure
             Latin
             and
             with
             iudgement
             ,
             and
             how
             to
             inuent
             matter
             of
             themselues
             .
          
           
             21.
             
             To
             enter
             to
             make
             a
             verse
             with
             delight
             ,
             without
             any
             bodging
             at
             all
             ;
             and
             to
             furnish
             with
             copie
             of
             Poëticall
             phrase
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             best
             Poëts
             .
          
           
             22.
             
             So
             to
             imitate
             and
             expresse
             Ouid
             or
             Virgil
             ,
             as
             you
             shall
             hardly
             discerne
             ,
             vnlesse
             you
             know
             the
             places
             ,
             whether
             the
             verses
             be
             the
             Authors
             or
             the
             Scholars
             :
             and
             to
             write
             verses
             ex
             tempore
             of
             any
             ordinarie
             theame
             .
          
           
             23.
             
             To
             translate
             forth
             of
             English
             or
             Latin
             into
             Greeke
             .
             Also
             to
             write
             theames
             or
             verses
             in
             Greeke
             .
          
           
             24.
             
             To
             pronounce
             naturally
             and
             sweetly
             ,
             without
             vaine
             affectation
             ;
             and
             to
             begin
             to
             do
             it
             from
             the
             lowest
             fourmes
             .
          
           
             25.
             
             To
             make
             right
             vse
             of
             the
             matter
             of
             their
             Authors
             ,
             besides
             the
             Latin
             ,
             euen
             from
             the
             first
             beginners
             :
             as
             of
             Sententiae
             ,
             and
             
               Confabulatiunculae
               Pueriles
               ,
               Cato
               ,
               Aesops
               fables
               ,
               Tullies
               ●pistles
               ,
               Ouids
               Metamorphosis
               ,
            
             and
             so
             on
             to
             the
             highest
             .
             To
             helpe
             to
             furnish
             them
             with
             varietie
             of
             the
             best
             morall
             matter
             ,
             and
             with
             vnderstanding
             ,
             wisdome
             ,
             and
             precepts
             of
             vertue
             ,
             as
             they
             grow
             ;
             and
             withall
             ,
             to
             imprint
             the
             Latin
             so
             in
             their
             minds
             therby
             ,
             as
             hardly
             to
             be
             forgottē
             .
          
           
             26.
             
             To
             answer
             concerning
             the
             matter
             contained
             in
             their
             Lectures
             ,
             in
             the
             Latin
             of
             their
             Authors
             ,
             from
             the
             lowest
             fourmes
             and
             so
             vpward
             .
          
           
             27.
             
             To
             construe
             anie
             ordinarie
             Author
             ex
             tempore
             .
          
           
             28.
             
             To
             come
             to
             that
             facilitie
             and
             ripenesse
             ,
             as
             not
             onely
             to
             translate
             leisurely
             and
             with
             some
             meditation
             ,
             both
             into
             English
             and
             Latin
             ,
             as
             before
             in
             the
             sections
             10.
             and
             11.
             but
             more
             also
             ,
             to
             reade
             anie
             easie
             Author
             forth
             of
             Latin
             into
             
             English
             ,
             and
             out
             of
             English
             to
             reade
             it
             into
             Latin
             againe
             ,
             as
             
               Corderius
               ,
               Terence
               ,
               Tullies
               Offices
               ,
            
             &c.
             
             To
             do
             this
             in
             Authors
             and
             places
             which
             they
             are
             not
             acquainted
             with
             ,
             and
             almost
             as
             fast
             as
             they
             are
             able
             ,
             to
             reade
             the
             Author
             alone
             .
          
           
             29.
             
             To
             write
             fa●re
             ,
             in
             Secretarie
             ,
             〈◊〉
             ,
             Gre●ke
             ,
             Hebrue
             ;
             〈…〉
             .
          
           
             30.
             
             To
             ●aue
             all
             the
             principall
             〈…〉
             Latin
             ,
             Greek
             and
             Hebrue
             ,
             with
             the
             etymologies
             both
             Latin
             and
             Greek
             :
             〈…〉
             worthie
             helpes
             and
             meanes
             to
             be
             had
             in
             the
             Vniuersities
             .
          
           
             31.
             
             To
             be
             acquainted
             with
             the
             grounds
             of
             Religion
             ,
             and
             to
             haue
             the
             summe
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             chiefe
             Histories
             of
             the
             Bible
             .
             To
             take
             all
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             Sermons
             ,
             if
             they
             be
             plainly
             and
             orderly
             deliuered
             :
             and
             to
             set
             them
             downe
             afterwards
             in
             a
             good
             Latin
             style
             ,
             or
             to
             reade
             them
             extempore
             into
             Latin
             out
             of
             the
             English.
             To
             conceiue
             and
             answer
             the
             seuerall
             points
             of
             the
             Sermons
             ,
             and
             how
             to
             make
             a
             briefe
             repetition
             of
             the
             whole
             Sermon
             without
             booke
             .
          
           
             32.
             
             To
             be
             set
             in
             the
             high
             way
             to
             attaine
             to
             the
             puritie
             and
             perfection
             of
             the
             Latine
             tongue
             by
             their
             further
             labour
             aud
             practise
             in
             the
             Vniuersitie
             :
             hauing
             both
             the
             rules
             &
             grounds
             thereof
             ,
             and
             also
             varietie
             of
             the
             best
             phrase
             meete
             and
             necessarie
             for
             them
             .
          
           
             33
             To
             grow
             in
             our
             owne
             English
             tongue
             ,
             according
             to
             their
             ages
             ,
             and
             growths
             in
             other
             learning
             :
             to
             vtter
             their
             〈◊〉
             in
             the
             same
             ,
             both
             in
             propriety
             ,
             and
             purity
             ;
             and
             so
             to
             be
             fitted
             for
             diuinity
             ,
             law
             ,
             or
             what
             other
             calling
             or
             faculty
             soeuer
             they
             shal
             be
             after
             employed
             in
             .
          
           
             34
             Finally
             ,
             thus
             to
             proceed
             together
             with
             the
             tongs
             ;
             in
             the
             vnderstanding
             and
             knowledge
             of
             the
             learning
             ,
             or
             matter
             contained
             in
             the
             same
             ,
             to
             become
             alike
             expert
             ,
             in
             all
             good
             learning
             ,
             meete
             for
             their
             yeares
             and
             studies
             ;
             that
             so
             proceeding
             
             still
             ,
             after
             they
             are
             gone
             from
             the
             Grammar
             Schooles
             ,
             they
             may
             become
             most
             exquisite
             in
             all
             kinds
             of
             good
             learning
             ,
             to
             which
             they
             shall
             be
             applied
             .
          
           
             These
             things
             may
             be
             effected
             in
             good
             sort
             ,
             through
             Gods
             blessing
             ,
             in
             the
             seuerall
             fourmes
             ,
             as
             the
             scholars
             proceed
             ,
             by
             so
             manie
             in
             each
             fourme
             as
             are
             apt
             and
             industrious
             ,
             onely
             by
             the
             directions
             in
             the
             Grammar
             schoole
             constantly
             obserued
             .
             If
             the
             Maisters
             being
             of
             any
             competent
             sufficiencie
             will
             take
             meete
             paines
             :
             and
             the
             Scholars
             being
             set
             to
             schoole
             ,
             so
             soone
             as
             they
             shall
             be
             meete
             ,
             be
             kept
             to
             learning
             daily
             ,
             without
             loitering
             ,
             hauing
             bookes
             and
             other
             necessarie
             helpes
             and
             encouragements
             :
             and
             by
             their
             par●nts
             care
             caused
             to
             do
             their
             exercises
             at
             home
             ,
             and
             be
             euer
             kept
             in
             meete
             awe
             ,
             and
             submission
             to
             their
             Maisters
             .
             But
             out
             of
             these
             I
             will
             extract
             onely
             those
             which
             I
             take
             most
             necessarie
             and
             profitable
             for
             schooles
             (
             not
             to
             trouble
             with
             ouer
             manie
             )
             and
             set
             them
             downe
             briefly
             in
             the
             Grammar
             Schoole
             .
             That
             so
             all
             scholars
             of
             anie
             towardnesse
             and
             diligence
             ,
             may
             be
             made
             good
             Grammarians
             and
             euerie
             way
             fit
             for
             the
             Vniuersitie
             by
             fifteene
             years
             of
             age
             ,
             or
             at
             least
             by
             that
             time
             that
             they
             shall
             be
             meete
             by
             discretion
             and
             gouernment
             ,
             which
             is
             commonly
             sixteene
             or
             seuenteene
             .
             And
             all
             this
             to
             be
             done
             with
             delight
             aud
             certaintie
             ,
             both
             to
             Maisters
             and
             Scholars
             ;
             with
             strife
             and
             contention
             amongest
             the
             Scholars
             themselues
             ,
             without
             that
             vsuall
             terrour
             and
             crueltie
             ,
             which
             hath
             bene
             practised
             in
             manie
             plaees
             ,
             and
             without
             so
             much
             as
             seueritie
             amongst
             good
             natures
             .
          
           
             How
             greatly
             all
             this
             must
             needs
             tend
             to
             the
             furtherance
             of
             the
             publike
             good
             ,
             euerie
             one
             may
             iudge
             ;
             which
             it
             will
             d●
             still
             ,
             so
             much
             the
             more
             as
             the
             Lord
             vouchsafeth
             a
             further
             supply
             ,
             to
             the
             seuerall
             meanes
             and
             courses
             after
             set
             downe
             ,
             by
             adjoining
             daily
             moe
             helpes
             and
             experiments
             ,
             especially
             of
             the
             learned
             .
             Of
             whom
             my
             hope
             is
             stil
             ,
             according
             to
             my
             earnest
             
             desire
             ,
             that
             they
             will
             lend
             their
             helping
             hands
             ,
             to
             the
             full
             perfecting
             of
             so
             profitable
             a
             worke
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             vndoubted
             certaintie
             hereof
             ,
             and
             of
             each
             particular
             ,
             first
             reade
             and
             consider
             of
             the
             meanes
             aright
             ,
             then
             try
             according
             to
             the
             directions
             in
             their
             seuerall
             places
             in
             the
             Grammar
             Schoole
             ,
             and
             so
             giue
             sentence
             .
          
           
             For
             mine
             owne
             selfe
             ,
             I
             trust
             (
             God
             assisting
             )
             to
             be
             euer
             able
             to
             make
             such
             plaine
             demonstration
             of
             euerie
             thing
             ,
             as
             to
             giue
             full
             satisfaction
             to
             any
             one
             indifferently
             affected
             ,
             that
             by
             labour
             and
             diligence
             all
             may
             be
             in
             good
             sort
             accomplished
             ,
             so
             farre
             as
             shall
             be
             requisite
             .
             Or
             wherein
             I
             shall
             be
             found
             too
             short
             ,
             I
             am
             resolued
             (
             God
             willing
             )
             neuer
             to
             giue
             ouer
             ,
             during
             life
             ,
             vntill
             I
             shall
             therein
             likewise
             see
             the
             desire
             of
             my
             soule
             ,
             vnto
             his
             glorie
             ,
             and
             the
             generall
             good
             of
             all
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             ❧
             Helps
             for
             attaining
             to
             those
             things
             mentioned
             in
             the
             Contents
             .
          
           
             THese
             helps
             God
             hath
             prouided
             for
             our
             Grammar-schooles
             ,
             more
             then
             in
             former
             times
             ,
             or
             at
             least
             more
             then
             are
             commonly
             knowne
             and
             vsed
             in
             them
             :
             whereof
             experience
             teacheth
             ,
             that
             there
             may
             be
             excellent
             furtherance
             in
             a
             right
             vse
             of
             them
             ,
             for
             all
             the
             seuerall
             parts
             of
             good
             learning
             in
             Schooles
             ,
             for
             obtaining
             the
             same
             more
             speedily
             ,
             easily
             ,
             surely
             &
             profitably
             :
             and
             namely
             for
             thus
             running
             through
             all
             our
             ordinary
             classicall-schoole
             authors
             ,
             and
             attaining
             to
             the
             best
             exercises
             and
             faculties
             in
             Schooles
             ,
             as
             any
             one
             shall
             haue
             occasion
             to
             vse
             them
             .
          
           
             First
             ,
             for
             the
             more
             speedy
             and
             right
             reading
             of
             English
             ,
             and
             so
             leading
             the
             childe
             as
             by
             the
             hand
             to
             the
             Grammar
             schoole
             ,
             as
             a
             preparatiue
             thereto
             .
          
           
             
               The
               English-schoolemaister
            
             ,
             of
             that
             honest
             and
             painfull
             Maister
             Coote
             .
          
           
             There
             is
             also
             a
             little
             Briefe
             ,
             of
             a
             sheet
             of
             paper
             named
             ,
             
               A
               Plaine
               Method
               for
               speedy
               learning
               to
               reade
               ,
            
             by
             
               Iohn
               Merest
            
             :
             of
             whose
             directions
             there
             might
             be
             very
             good
             vse
             ,
             if
             his
             Rules
             and
             style
             were
             amended
             by
             some
             Scholar
             ,
             and
             brought
             to
             perfection
             .
          
           
             Other
             directions
             and
             helps
             for
             teaching
             to
             reade
             ,
             see
             in
             the
             Grammar-schoole
             ,
             chap.
             3.
             
             For
             further
             growth
             of
             young
             Scholars
             in
             our
             English
             tongue
             ,
             to
             expresse
             
             their
             mindes
             in
             proprietie
             and
             puritie
             ,
             for
             their
             proceeding
             therein
             ,
             as
             they
             proceede
             in
             Latine
             :
             and
             also
             for
             them
             who
             would
             teach
             strangers
             our
             language
             ,
             or
             learne
             it
             .
             See
             after
             .
          
           
             Secondly
             ,
             for
             better
             learning
             the
             Accidence
             and
             first
             grounds
             of
             Grammar
             (
             whereas
             children
             are
             vsually
             very
             long
             in
             getting
             their
             Accidence
             ,
             and
             oft
             ,
             when
             they
             haue
             done
             it
             ,
             are
             little
             the
             better
             for
             it
             ,
             especially
             for
             the
             vnderstanding
             and
             right
             vse
             of
             it
             )
             to
             the
             end
             that
             the
             learner
             may
             get
             it
             sooner
             &
             more
             profitably
             :
             for
             a
             right
             vnderstanding
             and
             vse
             thereof
             ,
             and
             for
             answering
             any
             necessary
             question
             belonging
             to
             it
             ,
             and
             for
             better
             keeping
             all
             in
             memory
             ,
             to
             be
             able
             thereby
             to
             proceed
             most
             speedily
             ,
             pleasantly
             and
             certainely
             in
             their
             construction
             ,
             is
             prouided
             the
             Booke
             called
          
           
             The
             posing
             of
             the
             Parts
             .
             
               as
               also
            
          
           
             M.
             Leeches
             questions
             of
             Accidence
             and
             Grammar
             .
          
           
             Other
             helps
             ,
             especially
             for
             directing
             the
             Maisters
             ,
             see
             in
             the
             Grammar-schoole
             ,
             Chap.
             6.
             
          
           
             Thirdly
             ,
             for
             more
             speedy
             construing
             the
             Latin
             Grammar
             ,
             to
             saue
             much
             labour
             therein
             ,
             and
             for
             keeping
             the
             same
             with
             ease
             ,
             which
             is
             otherwise
             very
             hard
             to
             the
             children
             ,
             and
             ouer
             troublesome
             to
             the
             Maister
             ,
             Lillies
             rules
             construed
             .
          
           
             Fourthly
             ,
             for
             better
             conceiuing
             ,
             vnderstanding
             ,
             applying
             ,
             and
             making
             vse
             of
             all
             our
             Grammar
             rules
             .
          
           
             The
             Grammar
             of
             this
             last
             Impression
             hauing
             the
             summes
             of
             the
             Rules
             in
             the
             margents
             more
             perfectly
             and
             fully
             then
             formerly
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Syntax
             ,
             the
             words
             noted
             wherein
             the
             force
             of
             each
             ensample
             lieth
             .
             In
             the
             first
             Impression
             of
             them
             many
             things
             were
             mistaken
             and
             corrupted
             in
             the
             printing
             .
          
           
             Fiftly
             ,
             
             For
             speedy
             and
             profitable
             learning
             of
             all
             our
             
             first
             and
             lowest
             Schoole-bookes
             and
             Authors
             ,
             (
             whereas
             children
             are
             commonly
             very
             long
             in
             learning
             some
             little
             peece
             of
             them
             ,
             as
             of
             
               Sententiae
               pueriles
               ,
               Coufabulatiunculae
               ,
               Cato
               ,
               &c.
            
             and
             so
             the
             rest
             ;
             and
             when
             they
             haue
             learned
             them
             through
             with
             much
             toyle
             to
             themselues
             and
             their
             Maisters
             ,
             they
             are
             commonly
             little
             the
             better
             for
             them
             ,
             for
             any
             good
             vse
             ,
             and
             doe
             after
             presently
             forget
             them
             ,
             for
             the
             most
             part
             ;
             )
             to
             the
             end
             that
             they
             may
             soone
             runne
             thorow
             all
             of
             them
             ,
             or
             so
             much
             as
             shal
             be
             thought
             good
             ,
             and
             that
             for
             construing
             ,
             parsing
             ,
             vnderstanding
             ,
             reading
             them
             forth
             of
             Latine
             into
             English
             ,
             or
             forth
             of
             English
             into
             Latine
             ;
             for
             making
             the
             same
             Latine
             ,
             and
             prouing
             it
             ;
             and
             finally
             ,
             for
             leading
             the
             learner
             by
             the
             hand
             with
             delight
             ,
             vntill
             hee
             be
             able
             to
             go
             of
             himselfe
             by
             ordinary
             helpes
             ,
             
             with
             much
             lesse
             trouble
             to
             the
             Maister
             ,
             are
             prouided
             Grammaticall
             translations
             of
             them
             ,
             as
             namely
             ;
             first
             ,
             of
             
               Sententiae
               pueriles
               :
               Confabulatiunculae
               pueriles
               :
               Corderius
               dialogues
            
             chiefly
             for
             the
             ready
             helpe
             of
             speaking
             Latin
             of
             ordinary
             matters
             in
             a
             very
             good
             and
             pure
             phrase
             .
          
           
             
               Catoes
               morall
               Disticks
            
             ,
             with
             the
             Sentences
             adioyned
             ,
             and
             also
             
               Isocrates
               ad
               Daemonicum
            
             ,
             translated
             into
             latine
             by
             
               Rodolphus
               Agricola
            
             :
             part
             of
             
               Esops
               Fables
            
             :
             the
             first
             booke
             of
             
               Tullies
               Offices
            
             :
             part
             of
             
               Ouids
               Metamorphosis
               :
               Virgils
               Eclog●es
            
             ,
             with
             that
             excellent
             booke
             
               De
               Aptbus
            
             ,
             of
             the
             gouernement
             and
             ordering
             of
             Bees
             .
          
           
             All
             these
             are
             made
             so
             plaine
             ,
             
             as
             that
             children
             ,
             if
             they
             be
             any
             thing
             studious
             ,
             and
             well
             trained
             vp
             in
             the
             first
             grounds
             of
             Grammar
             ,
             by
             the
             former
             helpes
             ,
             may
             with
             a
             little
             direction
             ,
             euer
             prepare
             their
             lectures
             afore-hand
             at
             home
             ouer-night
             :
             such
             peeces
             (
             I
             meane
             )
             as
             they
             are
             to
             learne
             in
             lectures
             ;
             and
             that
             ,
             as
             was
             said
             ,
             fo●
             euerie
             good
             vse
             ,
             without
             neede
             of
             other
             Commentaries
             in
             
             any
             of
             them
             ,
             or
             so
             much
             helpe
             of
             the
             Maister
             as
             is
             vsuall
             .
             So
             that
             they
             will
             ,
             by
             the
             helpe
             of
             them
             ,
             fall
             to
             their
             priuate
             studies
             of
             themselues
             .
             And
             for
             things
             to
             be
             learned
             without
             booke
             ,
             namely
             their
             Authors
             in
             verse
             so
             translated
             ,
             they
             will
             be
             able
             thereby
             so
             to
             keep
             them
             ,
             as
             by
             the
             meanes
             thereof
             ,
             and
             their
             other
             helpes
             ,
             from
             quarter
             to
             quarter
             ,
             to
             say
             them
             without
             booke
             ,
             construe
             ,
             and
             to
             giue
             all
             the
             chiefe
             difficulties
             of
             them
             ,
             with
             a
             very
             little
             priuate
             labour
             ,
             thus
             to
             keep
             them
             better
             in
             memorie
             ,
             and
             haue
             vse
             of
             them
             continually
             .
          
           
             Hereof
             I
             might
             giue
             you
             instances
             of
             experiments
             ,
             according
             to
             which
             you
             might
             iudge
             of
             them
             ;
             but
             I
             passe
             them
             ouer
             ,
             standing
             vpon
             so
             euident
             grounds
             of
             reason
             ,
             as
             hath
             bene
             shewed
             before
             ,
             and
             as
             I
             shall
             more
             fully
             manifest
             (
             God
             willing
             )
             in
             the
             Grammar-Schoole
             ,
             chap.
             8.
             where
             I
             shall
             set
             downe
             the
             vse
             of
             them
             ,
             with
             th●
             benefit
             in
             a
             right
             practise
             .
          
           
             If
             you
             desire
             a
             praxis
             of
             all
             or
             most
             of
             the
             chiefe
             rules
             of
             the
             Syntax
             or
             construction
             shortly
             comprized
             ,
             take
             Maister
             Leeches
             Dialogues
             ,
             
             set
             downe
             in
             the
             end
             of
             his
             Grammar-questions
             :
             which
             Dialogues
             are
             so
             contriued
             of
             purpose
             for
             children
             to
             that
             end
             :
             and
             so
             likewise
             translated
             into
             English
             ,
             as
             they
             may
             be
             gone
             through
             for
             each
             good
             vse
             so
             soone
             as
             any
             of
             the
             former
             .
          
           
             By
             that
             time
             that
             children
             haue
             gone
             through
             these
             bookes
             so
             translated
             ,
             and
             haue
             by
             this
             practise
             attained
             vnto
             the
             knowledge
             and
             right
             vse
             of
             their
             Grammar
             rules
             ,
             especially
             that
             golden
             rule
             of
             Construing
             :
             for
             construing
             ,
             parsing
             ,
             &c.
             they
             will
             be
             able
             ,
             easily
             ,
             with
             much
             lesse
             toyle
             of
             the
             Maister
             ,
             to
             go
             through
             all
             other
             classicall-Schoole-Authors
             ,
             by
             such
             helpes
             and
             meanes
             as
             God
             hath
             further
             prouided
             .
          
           
             For
             speedy
             running
             ouer
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             lower
             schoole
             
             
             bookes
             ,
             which
             are
             not
             so
             translated
             grammatically
             :
             first
             ,
             the
             other
             translations
             of
             them
             may
             be
             of
             very
             good
             vse
             thus
             farre
             foorth
             .
             As
             namely
             ,
             first
             to
             giue
             the
             learners
             some
             light
             for
             the
             right
             vnderstanding
             &
             meaning
             of
             the
             Authors
             (
             which
             vnderstanding
             of
             the
             matter
             is
             a
             maine
             foundation
             for
             the
             speedy
             attaining
             to
             any
             such
             learning
             ,
             especially
             for
             getting
             the
             Languages
             ,
             as
             I
             haue
             shewed
             elsewhere
             )
             as
             also
             for
             resoluing
             the
             Authors
             ,
             and
             affoording
             some
             good
             English
             phrase
             ,
             with
             varietie
             thereof
             to
             expresse
             their
             minds
             .
             And
             withall
             ,
             that
             by
             the
             right
             vse
             of
             such
             translations
             ,
             they
             may
             the
             more
             easily
             learne
             the
             manner
             of
             our
             vsuall
             translating
             of
             Authors
             ,
             or
             anie
             other
             worke
             ,
             respecting
             onely
             the
             matter
             and
             intent
             of
             the
             Author
             ,
             whereof
             our
             commonest
             vse
             is
             :
             and
             so
             for
             reading
             forth
             of
             Latin
             into
             our
             owne
             tongue
             ,
             to
             expresse
             the
             sense
             onely
             ,
             not
             directly
             ,
             verbatim
             ,
             or
             grammatically
             ,
             but
             obseruing
             perfect
             sense
             ,
             good
             phrase
             ,
             and
             purity
             of
             our
             tongue
             ,
             and
             so
             back
             againe
             out
             of
             the
             English
             into
             a
             good
             Latine
             style
             in
             like
             manner
             .
             For
             the
             right
             learning
             of
             these
             Authors
             doth
             not
             so
             much
             consist
             in
             the
             construing
             and
             parsing
             of
             them
             ,
             as
             in
             getting
             by
             them
             the
             matter
             ,
             phrase
             and
             style
             of
             the
             Author
             ,
             and
             to
             these
             ends
             and
             purposes
             amongst
             others
             ,
             as
             I
             take
             it
             ,
             they
             haue
             bene
             translated
             ,
             and
             are
             many
             of
             them
             vnknowne
             to
             most
             .
          
           
             
               The
               Translations
               are
               these
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               For
               the
               rest
               of
               
                 Tullies
                 Offices
              
               ,
               
               which
               are
               not
               translated
               grammatically
               ;
               as
               namely
               the
               two
               latter
               bookes
               ,
               Maister
               Grimmald
               his
               translation
               ,
               which
               yet
               would
               be
               much
               more
               profitable
               to
               this
               end
               ,
               to
               them
               who
               would
               make
               vse
               of
               it
               ,
               if
               the
               English
               were
               separated
               from
               the
               Latine
               ,
               set
               in
               a
               booke
               by
               it selfe
               ,
               as
               the
               Grammaticall
               and
               other
               translations
               vsually
               are
               .
            
             
             
               2.
               
               For
               Tullie
               De
               Amicitia
               ,
               Senectute
               ,
               &c.
               Thomas
               Newtous
               translation
               .
               
            
             
               3.
               
               For
               the
               rest
               of
               
                 Ouids
                 Metamorphosis
                 ,
                 Arthur
                 Goldings
              
               translation
               in
               very
               good
               English
               meeter
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               For
               
                 Ouid
                 de
                 Tristibus
              
               ,
               the
               translation
               hereof
               in
               English
               meeter
               .
               
            
             
               5.
               
               
                 Ouids
                 Epistles
              
               ,
               the
               like
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               For
               the
               rest
               of
               
                 Virgils
                 Georgickes
              
               ,
               not
               translated
               grammatically
               ,
               Maister
               
                 Abraham
                 Flemmings
              
               translation
               in
               English
               meeter
               ,
               comming
               next
               to
               the
               Grammaticall
               translations
               .
            
             
               7.
               
               For
               
                 Virgils
                 Aeneidos
              
               ,
               Maister
               Phaer
               
               in
               English
               meeter
               .
            
             
               8.
               
               For
               Terence
               ,
               
               if
               you
               thinke
               good
               ,
               and
               especially
               to
               furnish
               with
               English
               phrase
               to
               answer
               the
               Latine
               ,
               and
               by
               reading
               out
               of
               the
               English
               into
               Latin
               ,
               to
               helpe
               more
               speedily
               to
               obtaine
               the
               Latin
               phrase
               and
               style
               ,
               Maister
               Barnards
               translation
               .
            
             
               Prouided
               alwayes
               ,
               
               that
               this
               be
               with
               great
               caution
               ,
               for
               auoyding
               all
               danger
               of
               corrupting
               their
               manners
               by
               lasciuiousnesse
               or
               otherwise
               ;
               considering
               the
               pronenesse
               of
               our
               nature
               ,
               like
               to
               tinder
               or
               gunpowder
               ,
               if
               neuer
               so
               little
               a
               sparke
               fall
               into
               the
               same
               .
               The
               like
               caution
               is
               to
               be
               had
               for
               other
               ,
               as
               
                 Horace
                 ,
                 Iuvenal
                 ,
                 Persius
                 ,
                 Martial
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
            
          
           
             
               For
               higher
               Authors
               .
            
             
               For
               the
               more
               profitable
               ,
               
               easie
               ,
               and
               speedy
               reading
               ouer
               Caesars
               Commentaries
               (
               concerning
               the
               Roman
               warre
               a●chiued
               chiefly
               by
               Caesar
               )
               to
               the
               end
               not
               onely
               to
               giue
               light
               :
               first
               ,
               for
               the
               true
               vnderstanding
               of
               the
               Author
               ,
               but
               also
               to
               expresse
               the
               same
               in
               the
               best
               and
               fittest
               words
               in
               
               a
               pure
               English
               phrase
               ;
               and
               likewise
               for
               notable
               obseruations
               for
               warre
               ,
               gathered
               all
               along
               out
               of
               it
               ,
               which
               is
               one
               principall
               vse
               of
               the
               booke
               .
            
             
               The
               translation
               of
               it
               by
               Sir
               
                 Clement
                 Edmunds
              
               ,
               Clarke
               of
               the
               Councell
               .
            
             
               This
               booke
               ,
               as
               it
               is
               wel
               knowne
               to
               be
               the
               purest
               style
               ,
               and
               an
               excellent
               history
               for
               matter
               of
               warre
               and
               martiall
               affaires
               ,
               and
               therefore
               most
               necessary
               for
               our
               dayes
               ,
               for
               the
               better
               helping
               to
               preserue
               the
               Church
               of
               God
               and
               our
               natiue
               countrey
               ;
               so
               it
               is
               difficult
               for
               children
               ,
               in
               regard
               of
               the
               subiect
               ,
               viz.
               matter
               of
               warre
               ,
               which
               they
               are
               not
               acquainted
               with
               .
               Yet
               by
               the
               Translation
               rightly
               vsed
               ,
               it
               is
               made
               so
               plaine
               &
               easie
               ,
               that
               children
               of
               twelue
               or
               thirteene
               yeares
               of
               age
               ,
               rightly
               trained
               vp
               ,
               may
               be
               able
               to
               go
               through
               it
               for
               all
               the
               vses
               mentioned
               in
               short
               space
               ,
               and
               much
               more
               others
               of
               riper
               iudgement
               .
               So
               that
               it
               were
               great
               pitty
               ,
               in
               regard
               of
               the
               benefit
               that
               may
               come
               by
               it
               to
               all
               sorts
               ,
               that
               so
               worthy
               a
               worke
               should
               lie
               hid
               as
               it
               were
               ,
               being
               vnknowne
               to
               the
               greatest
               part
               .
            
             
               The
               like
               we
               may
               say
               for
               these
               following
               .
               For
               
                 Lucans
                 Pharsalia
              
               
               of
               the
               like
               argument
               in
               verse
               ,
               viz.
               of
               the
               warre
               betweene
               Caesar
               and
               Pompey
               ,
               Sir
               
                 Arthur
                 Gorge
              
               in
               English
               meeter
               .
            
             
               For
               Liuy
               his
               Roman
               history
               ,
               D.
               Hollands
               translation
               .
               
            
             
               For
               that
               excellent
               part
               of
               the
               Roman
               history
               by
               
                 Cornelius
                 Tacitus
              
               his
               foure
               Bookes
               ,
               
               translated
               by
               that
               worthy
               fauourer
               and
               rare
               promoter
               of
               all
               good
               learning
               ,
               Sir
               
                 Henry
                 Sauill
              
               .
            
             
               For
               Florus
               
               his
               Roman
               history
               ,
               from
               the
               foundation
               of
               Rome
               to
               Tratanus
               ,
               the
               translation
               of
               it
               ,
               dedicated
               to
               the
               Lord
               Marquesse
               of
               Buckingham
               .
            
             
               For
               Seneca
               ,
               
               that
               admirable
               Moralist
               and
               sweete
               Latinist
               ,
               the
               translation
               of
               it
               by
               Maister
               Lodge
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               Commentaries
               .
            
             
               Besides
               these
               Translations
               for
               the
               ordinary
               schoole-authors
               ,
               
               there
               are
               also
               Commentaries
               for
               them
               who
               desire
               their
               helpe
               ;
               as
               ,
               for
               all
               Ouid
               ,
               not
               onely
               that
               large
               Commentary
               of
               sundry
               together
               ,
               but
               more
               particularly
               ,
               For
               
                 Ouids
                 Metamorphosis
                 ,
                 Sabins
              
               Morals
               briefly
               .
            
             
               Also
               
                 Raphael
                 Regius
              
               ,
               a
               large
               Commentary
               .
            
             
               For
               Virgil
               ,
               
               besides
               the
               large
               Commentary
               of
               Seruius
               and
               Donate
               ,
               with
               the
               Annotations
               of
               sundry
               other
               ,
               set
               out
               by
               Frabricius
               :
               see
               ,
            
             
               The
               Analysis
               of
               Ramus
               on
               the
               Eclogues
               and
               Georgicks
               for
               the
               Logicke
               and
               Rhetoricke
               thereof
               .
               
            
             
               A
               very
               sweete
               paraphrase
               of
               Friskiline
               on
               the
               Eclogues
               and
               Georgickes
               .
               
            
             
               Meins
               Annotations
               on
               Virgil.
               
               So
               for
               the
               vse
               of
               the
               Maisters
               ,
               and
               all
               of
               riper
               yeares
               and
               vnderstanding
               :
            
             
               Taubman
               on
               Virgil
               ,
               a
               very
               profitable
               worke
               .
            
             
               Moreouer
               ,
               
               for
               the
               speedy
               and
               more
               profitable
               reading
               of
               all
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               chiefe
               ancient
               Poets
               ,
               are
               prouided
               short
               and
               pithy
               Commentaries
               ,
               or
               Annotations
               ,
               containing
               the
               substance
               and
               whatsoeuer
               is
               of
               worth
               in
               all
               the
               ancient
               and
               large
               Commentaries
               ,
               and
               the
               same
               made
               so
               plaine
               ,
               as
               that
               very
               children
               ,
               rightly
               trained
               vp
               ,
               may
               be
               able
               ,
               by
               them
               ,
               to
               reade
               their
               Lectures
               of
               themselues
               ,
               or
               with
               very
               little
               helpe
               :
               whereas
               formerly
               they
               were
               ouer
               crabbed
               and
               obscure
               for
               the
               Maisters
               in
               many
               places
               to
               vnderstand
               ;
               as
               namely
               ,
            
             
               Maister
               Bonds
               Commentarie
               on
               Horace
               and
               Persius
               .
               
            
             
               
                 Maister
                 Farnabee
                 on
                 
              
               
                 Iuvenal
                 ,
              
               
                 Persius
                 ,
              
               
                 Lucan
                 ,
              
               
                 Senecaes
                 tragedies
                 .
              
               
                 Martiall
                 .
              
            
             
             
               Also
               ,
               
               for
               the
               more
               cleare
               and
               full
               vnderstanding
               of
               these
               and
               of
               all
               the
               Romane
               historie
               and
               Antiquities
               ;
               
                 Romanae
                 historiae
                 Anthologia
                 ,
                 viz.
              
               a
               short
               and
               very
               plaine
               Exposition
               in
               English
               ,
               of
               the
               Romane
               Antiquities
               ,
               by
               Maister
               Goodwine
               of
               Oxford
               ,
               for
               the
               vse
               of
               Abingdons
               Schoole
               .
            
          
           
             
               Theames
               .
            
             
               For
               helpes
               for
               Theames
               both
               for
               matter
               and
               maner
               ,
               besides
               the
               vnderstanding
               of
               Aphthonius
               common
               Places
               ,
               
               and
               the
               chiefe
               heads
               of
               Inuention
               by
               Ramus
               and
               others
               ,
               see
               Maister
               Vicars
               his
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               or
               Manuductio
               ,
               leading
               the
               scholar
               (
               as
               by
               the
               hand
               )
               to
               the
               vse
               of
               Rhetoricke
               ;
               especially
               for
               making
               Theames
               ,
               Declamations
               ,
               or
               Orations
               .
            
             
               For
               matter
               ,
               viz.
               for
               short
               ,
               witty
               ,
               and
               easie
               Sentences
               for
               the
               yonger
               sort
               ,
               
               Maister
               Drax
               his
               
                 Bibliotheca
                 scholastica
                 .
                 Flores
                 Senecae
              
               .
            
             
               Epitome
               sentent
               .
               Stobaei
               .
            
             
               For
               store
               of
               the
               best
               examples
               for
               Theams
               both
               Roman
               and
               forren
               of
               most
               morall
               matters
               ,
               
               in
               stead
               of
               new
               ,
               they
               may
               vse
               
                 Valerius
                 Maximus
              
               .
            
             
               This
               is
               made
               plain
               for
               the
               better
               help
               of
               the
               teachers
               where
               need
               is
               ,
               by
               two
               ancient
               Commentaries
               together
               ,
               the
               one
               of
               them
               by
               
                 Oliuerus
                 Arzignanensis
              
               ,
               the
               other
               by
               
                 Badius
                 Ascensius
              
               ,
               expounding
               euery
               thing
               clearely
               ,
               and
               almost
               grammatically
               ,
               besides
               the
               Annotations
               of
               others
               .
            
             
               For
               further
               help
               of
               Theames
               ,
               
               both
               Latin
               and
               Greek
               ,
               Stobaeus
               sentences
               ,
               or
               his
               Anthologia
               of
               the
               largest
               :
               a
               most
               excellent
               worke
               ,
               gathered
               &
               digested
               by
               him
               Common
               place-wise
               ,
               in
               Greeke
               ,
               out
               of
               all
               the
               famous
               Greeke
               Authors
               ,
               translated
               into
               Latin
               by
               Gesnere
               that
               learned
               Phisitian
               ,
               hauing
               the
               Latin
               set
               ouer-against
               the
               Greek
               ,
               and
               may
               be
               singular
               for
               acquainting
               the
               higher
               and
               better
               
               sort
               of
               scholars
               ,
               with
               the
               best
               morall
               matter
               of
               sundry
               kindes
               .
            
             
               For
               phrases
               in
               generall
               ,
               
               Maister
               Drax
               his
               Cilliepeia
               .
            
             
               For
               Epithets
               ,
               
                 Ciceroniana
                 Epitheta
              
               .
            
             
               For
               some
               select
               Phrases
               to
               this
               purpose
               ,
               
               and
               the
               like
               ,
               Maister
               
                 Farnabees
                 phrases
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Epistles
               and
               Letters
               .
            
             
               For
               patterns
               of
               short
               Epistles
               and
               pithy
               letters
               of
               all
               sorts
               of
               matter
               ;
               
               see
               the
               Laconicall
               Epistles
               ,
               to
               wit
               ,
               the
               shortest
               and
               pithiest
               gathered
               out
               of
               
                 Tullie
                 ,
                 Manutius
                 ,
                 Politian
                 ,
                 Erasmus
                 ,
              
               and
               many
               others
               ,
               comprized
               by
               Buchlerus
               in
               a
               little
               volume
               of
               purpose
               to
               this
               end
               .
            
             
               For
               examples
               ,
               
               seruing
               and
               directing
               for
               imitation
               of
               sundry
               kindes
               of
               Epistles
               ,
               both
               Consolatory
               ,
               Gratulatory
               ,
               and
               also
               Hortatory
               ,
               with
               all
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               kinds
               of
               Examples
               :
               see
               
                 Flores
                 &
                 Sententiae
                 scribendique
                 formulae
                 illustres
                 .
              
            
             
               For
               pure
               phrases
               more
               peculiarly
               belonging
               to
               Epistles
               ,
               see
               Manutius
               phrases
               .
            
          
           
             
               Orations
               .
            
             
               For
               Orations
               :
               
               The
               Orations
               of
               sundry
               ,
               and
               those
               of
               diuers
               kindes
               of
               Morall
               matters
               ,
               and
               vpon
               sundry
               occasions
               ,
               gathered
               and
               set
               forth
               by
               
                 Melchior
                 Iunius
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Examining
               of
               Phrases
               in
               Prose
               .
            
             
               For
               helpe
               in
               examining
               of
               phrases
               ,
               
               and
               so
               for
               obseruing
               propriety
               and
               purity
               therein
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               Godscalcus
               his
               obseruations
               of
               the
               Latin
               tongue
               digested
               alphabetically
               .
               
            
             
               2.
               
               Schorus
               phrases
               ,
               
               shewing
               also
               the
               manner
               how
               to
               obserue
               phrases
               in
               the
               reading
               of
               Authors
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               Erasmus
               his
               Epitome
               of
               Vallaes
               elegancies
               ,
               
               of
               the
               last
               Edition
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               Popma
               de
               Differentijs
               verborum
               .
            
             
             
               For
               flourishing
               and
               amplifying
               in
               Prose
               ,
               
                 see
                 Ciceroniana
                 Epitheta
                 ,
                 Antitheta
                 &
                 Adiuncta
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               Poetrie
               .
            
             
               Besides
               
                 Textoris
                 Epitheta
              
               ,
               
               See
               
                 Buchleri
                 Thesaurus
                 poëticus
              
               ,
               a
               booke
               of
               notable
               vse
               for
               each
               scholar
               :
               for
               helpes
               of
               Epithets
               and
               Poeticall
               phrases
               :
               and
               also
               for
               his
               direction
               of
               the
               right
               manner
               of
               making
               a
               pure
               verse
               ,
               with
               other
               things
               belonging
               thereto
               .
            
             
               For
               quantities
               of
               Syllables
               ,
               
               Smetius
               his
               Prosodia
               .
            
          
           
             
               Dictionaries
               .
            
             
               For
               both
               English
               and
               Latine
               ,
               
               especially
               for
               finding
               out
               the
               fittest
               Latin
               words
               to
               the
               English
               ,
               and
               most
               naturall
               ;
               and
               according
               to
               propriety
               first
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               Etymologies
               or
               notations
               of
               the
               Latine
               words
               ,
               
               Riders
               dictionarie
               of
               the
               last
               .
            
             
               For
               giuing
               the
               Greeke
               to
               the
               Latine
               ,
               and
               for
               supply
               of
               sundry
               of
               the
               best
               Latin
               phrases
               expounded
               ,
               
               and
               the
               vse
               shewed
               ,
               Thomas
               Dictionarie
               of
               the
               last
               .
            
             
               For
               a
               short
               comprising
               of
               most
               Latine
               Primitiues
               in
               Sentences
               (
               except
               those
               which
               belong
               to
               the
               seuerall
               Arts
               and
               Trades
               &c.
               )
               and
               so
               to
               furnish
               with
               most
               words
               of
               all
               sorts
               ,
               
               for
               reading
               of
               any
               ordinary
               author
               belonging
               to
               the
               grammar
               schoole
               ,
               or
               otherwise
               ,
               
                 Ianua
                 linguarum
              
               ,
               a
               booke
               in
               twelue
               hundred
               sentences
               containing
               the
               most
               of
               the
               ordinary
               words
               ,
               to
               be
               euen
               as
               a
               Dictionarie
               in
               the
               childrens
               heads
               ,
               translated
               into
               English
               ,
               to
               the
               end
               it
               may
               be
               more
               easily
               and
               speedily
               gotten
               .
            
          
           
             
               Analysis
               or
               resoluing
               of
               Authors
               .
            
             
               For
               a
               plaine
               and
               easie
               resolution
               of
               the
               matter
               of
               Authors
               meete
               for
               young
               scholars
               ,
               
               see
               the
               grammaticall
               translation
               of
               the
               first
               booke
               of
               Tullies
               Offices
               .
            
             
               Also
               of
               the
               first
               booke
               of
               
                 Ouids
                 Metamorphosis
              
               .
            
             
               And
               withall
               ,
               the
               like
               translation
               of
               the
               first
               and
               last
               
               Eclogue
               of
               Vìrgil
               ,
               and
               of
               his
               fourth
               booke
               of
               the
               
                 Georgickes
                 De
                 Apibus
              
               ,
               some
               of
               these
               in
               the
               inmost
               colums
               ,
               others
               in
               the
               outmost
               .
            
             
               For
               a
               more
               learned
               Analysis
               in
               Latine
               ,
               both
               Logicall
               and
               Rhetoricall
               ,
               see
               Ramus
               Commentaries
               on
               the
               Eclogues
               and
               Georgickes
               ,
               and
               also
               vpon
               all
               the
               Orations
               of
               Tully
               ,
               on
               which
               he
               hath
               commented
               .
               Also
               
                 Piscators
                 Analysis
              
               of
               Tullies
               Offices
               .
            
             
               For
               a
               short
               and
               methodicall
               Analysis
               of
               the
               seuerall
               bookes
               of
               the
               Scripture
               ,
               and
               of
               each
               chapter
               therein
               ,
               see
               
                 Gemma
                 Fabri
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Disputing
               scholar-like
               of
               Grammar
               Questions
               ,
               and
               to
               prepare
               for
               more
               learned
               Disputations
               in
               the
               Vniuersities
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               In
               English
               ,
               
               by
               way
               of
               Questions
               and
               Answers
               to
               make
               children
               perfect
               in
               the
               Accidence
               and
               Grammar
               ;
               The
               Posing
               of
               the
               Parts
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               In
               Latine
               ,
               
               for
               the
               better
               scholars
               in
               a
               more
               large
               and
               scholar-like
               dispute
               ,
               Maister
               Stockwoods
               disputations
               of
               Grammar
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               For
               the
               like
               dispute
               in
               Tullies
               Offices
               by
               Questions
               and
               Answers
               ,
               
               the
               better
               to
               vnderstand
               the
               rare
               and
               almost
               diuine
               matter
               ,
               for
               direction
               of
               manners
               ,
               in
               that
               booke
               ,
               Maister
               Brasbridge
               his
               Questions
               of
               Tullies
               Offices
               .
            
          
           
             
               Proper
               words
               for
               seuerall
               Arts
               and
               Sciences
               .
            
             
               To
               be
               able
               to
               get
               and
               remember
               words
               appertaining
               to
               Arts
               ,
               
               Trades
               ,
               Sciences
               ,
               histories
               of
               diuers
               kinds
               ,
               and
               the
               like
               ,
               as
               any
               one
               desireth
               them
               ;
               first
               Maister
               Stanbridge
               his
               Vocabula
               in
               verse
               .
               These
               verses
               are
               some
               of
               them
               amended
               already
               ;
               the
               rest
               so
               purposed
               .
            
             
             
               After
               him
               ,
               where
               he
               ends
               ,
               others
               may
               be
               adioyned
               ,
               in
               the
               end
               of
               Hunters
               Cosmographie
               ,
               in
               verse
               likewise
               .
            
             
               For
               words
               belonging
               to
               Astronomy
               and
               Cosmography
               :
               
               and
               also
               the
               ancient
               proper
               names
               of
               places
               ,
               as
               Countries
               ,
               Cities
               ,
               and
               Riuers
               ,
               &c.
               
               Hunters
               Cosmographie
               in
               verse
               .
            
             
               If
               the
               names
               of
               the
               places
               ,
               
               riuers
               ,
               &c.
               as
               they
               are
               termed
               at
               this
               day
               ,
               were
               set
               directly
               ouer
               the
               heads
               of
               each
               of
               the
               ancient
               names
               there
               ,
               after
               the
               manner
               of
               
                 Stanbridges
                 Vocabula
              
               ,
               it
               might
               be
               of
               most
               excellent
               vse
               ,
               and
               soone
               gotten
               ,
               or
               set
               on
               the
               opposite
               page
               directly
               against
               them
               .
            
             
               All
               other
               words
               of
               like
               nature
               ,
               belonging
               to
               the
               seuerall
               histories
               ,
               or
               whatsoeuer
               else
               ,
               might
               be
               thus
               comprised
               in
               verse
               ,
               after
               the
               manner
               of
               Stanbridge
               or
               Hunter
               ,
               or
               otherwise
               ,
               they
               might
               be
               set
               downe
               in
               a
               short
               narration
               ,
               in
               forme
               of
               a
               Dialogue
               grammatically
               translated
               ,
               after
               the
               manner
               of
               Corderius
               Dialogues
               ,
               wherein
               he
               sets
               out
               ,
               to
               the
               like
               purpose
               ,
               a
               very
               sumptuous
               banquet
               in
               an
               historicall
               narration
               ,
               in
               the
               22.
               
               Dialogue
               of
               his
               fourth
               booke
               .
            
             
               Such
               a
               booke
               might
               easily
               be
               compiled
               by
               a
               iudicious
               scholar
               ,
               
               of
               a
               pregnant
               wit
               ,
               hauing
               meete
               leisure
               ,
               by
               the
               helpe
               of
               
                 Hadrianus
                 Iunius
              
               his
               Nomenclator
               ;
               and
               the
               speciall
               Dictionaries
               for
               seuerall
               vses
               ,
               and
               so
               any
               such
               words
               be
               very
               readily
               gotten
               ,
               by
               studying
               and
               reading
               them
               oft
               forth
               of
               English
               into
               Latin
               :
               as
               experience
               teacheth
               in
               the
               like
               .
            
             
               But
               all
               these
               would
               be
               gotten
               much
               sooner
               ,
               
               if
               being
               thus
               verbally
               translated
               into
               English
               ,
               the
               English
               were
               set
               by
               it selfe
               ,
               so
               to
               study
               it
               out
               of
               them
               ,
               like
               as
               the
               Grammar
               translations
               are
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               Greeke
               .
            
             
               Whereas
               there
               is
               nothing
               in
               any
               tongue
               for
               the
               perfect
               obtaining
               of
               it
               ,
               
               but
               Grammar
               ,
               words
               ,
               and
               practise
               of
               them
               in
               a
               right
               composing
               and
               setting
               them
               together
               :
               I
               meane
               ,
               first
               ,
               the
               knowledge
               of
               the
               Grammar
               rules
               ,
               belonging
               to
               that
               tongue
               ;
               words
               to
               expresse
               the
               minde
               ,
               and
               practise
               of
               both
               in
               reading
               Authors
               ,
               and
               in
               writing
               ;
               for
               most
               easie
               and
               speedy
               attaining
               to
               the
               Greek
               tongue
               ,
               which
               hath
               bene
               wont
               to
               be
               so
               difficult
               and
               tedious
               :
               God
               hath
               prouided
               these
               readie
               helpes
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               For
               the
               Grammar
               ,
               
               Maister
               Camdens
               is
               of
               all
               other
               most
               easie
               and
               profitable
               (
               as
               I
               take
               it
               )
               like
               as
               for
               Westminster
               ,
               so
               for
               all
               our
               schooles
               ;
               for
               that
               it
               followes
               the
               order
               of
               our
               Latine
               Grammar
               most
               directly
               ,
               chiefly
               in
               the
               Syntax
               ,
               wherein
               many
               of
               the
               rules
               are
               the
               very
               same
               ,
               or
               neare
               vnto
               them
               .
               The
               Anomalies
               in
               the
               Verbs
               being
               set
               alphabetically
               ,
               so
               as
               they
               may
               be
               found
               very
               readily
               ;
               and
               the
               Dialects
               set
               directly
               after
               the
               order
               of
               the
               Declensions
               and
               Coniugations
               ,
               that
               by
               it
               alone
               well
               studied
               ,
               most
               difficulties
               may
               be
               easily
               vnderstood
               and
               answered
               .
            
             
               For
               all
               other
               difficulties
               ,
               
               and
               wherein
               it
               seemes
               to
               faile
               ;
               see
               Cleonards
               Greeke
               Grammar
               ,
               with
               Antesignanus
               ,
               set
               foorth
               by
               Sylburgius
               ,
               wherein
               by
               the
               help
               of
               the
               large
               Index
               ,
               you
               may
               be
               resolued
               of
               most
               doubts
               .
            
             
               Hereunto
               adioyne
               ,
               
               if
               need
               be
               to
               enquire
               further
               ,
               the
               Anomalies
               ,
               Dialects
               and
               other
               difficulties
               set
               downe
               alphabetically
               in
               the
               end
               of
               Scapulaes
               Dictionary
               .
            
             
               Secondly
               ,
               
               for
               attaining
               very
               speedily
               to
               all
               the
               Greek
               Primitiues
               or
               Radices
               ;
               which
               being
               had
               ,
               all
               the
               rest
               are
               easily
               and
               plainely
               learned
               ,
               as
               deriued
               from
               them
               ,
               God
               hath
               prouided
               ,
            
             
               1.
               
               The
               
                 Clauis
                 linguae
                 Graecae
              
               ,
               
               by
               Lubine
               .
               In
               which
               litle
               
               briefe
               ,
               all
               ,
               or
               most
               of
               the
               Greeke
               Radices
               are
               included
               in
               some
               seuen
               hundred
               little
               sentences
               ,
               in
               imitation
               of
               
                 Ianua
                 linguarum
              
               ,
               with
               a
               double
               Index
               adioyned
               ,
               viz.
               both
               Latine
               before
               the
               Greeke
               ,
               and
               Greeke
               before
               the
               Latine
               ;
               whereby
               they
               may
               be
               soone
               gotten
               ,
               and
               easily
               kept
               ,
               or
               recouered
               being
               forgotten
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               For
               the
               more
               full
               vnderstanding
               of
               the
               tongue
               ,
               
               for
               propriety
               and
               right
               significations
               ,
               Notations
               or
               Etymologies
               ,
               Deriuations
               ,
               and
               the
               like
               ,
               see
               
                 Fundamentum
                 linguae
                 Graecae
              
               ;
               a
               little
               Epytome
               gathered
               briefly
               of
               purpose
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               order
               of
               Scapula
               .
               For
               the
               larger
               explication
               of
               the
               same
               ,
               with
               phrases
               and
               vse
               of
               words
               ;
               see
               Scapula
               .
            
             
               For
               practise
               in
               reading
               some
               vsuall
               Authors
               .
               
               The
               fittest
               for
               yong
               scholars
               (
               so
               faire
               as
               I
               can
               iudge
               )
               after
               they
               haue
               runne
               through
               their
               Clauis
               ,
               if
               you
               will
               begin
               with
               Poetry
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               learne
               to
               make
               a
               verse
               in
               Greek
               ,
               is
            
             
               Theognis
               his
               sentences
               with
               the
               other
               Poets
               ioyned
               with
               him
               ;
               as
               namely
               
                 Phocilides
                 ,
                 Pythagoras
                 ,
                 &c.
              
               with
               the
               Latine
               translation
               and
               annotations
               thereof
               ,
               set
               forth
               by
               Silburgius
               .
               Some
               whereof
               being
               learned
               without
               booke
               perfectly
               ,
               is
               a
               speciall
               helpe
               that
               scholars
               may
               haue
               quantities
               ,
               phrase
               ,
               and
               apt
               morall
               matter
               for
               verse
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               If
               you
               please
               to
               reade
               Hesiode
               his
               
                 Opera
                 &
                 Dies
              
               ,
               
               you
               may
               vse
               Ceporine
               and
               Melancthons
               Commentaries
               set
               foorth
               by
               
                 Iohannes
                 Frisius
                 Tigurinus
              
               ;
               and
               the
               new
               translation
               of
               it
               by
               
                 Erasmus
                 Schemidt
              
               professor
               at
               Wittenberg
               .
            
             
               Or
               if
               you
               desire
               to
               reade
               Homer
               ,
               
               which
               is
               most
               generally
               approued
               of
               all
               ,
               as
               the
               most
               excellent
               Poet
               :
               besides
               the
               Latine
               Translations
               ,
               especially
               that
               which
               expoundeth
               it
               most
               neerly
               and
               properly
               .
            
             
               For
               the
               better
               vnderstanding
               and
               expressing
               of
               it
               in
               
               English
               ,
               
               Maister
               Chapmans
               translation
               in
               English
               meeter
               ;
               whom
               we
               may
               rightly
               call
               ,
               the
               English
               Homer
               .
            
             
               To
               these
               you
               may
               adde
               ,
               
               if
               you
               will
               ,
               Eustathius
               ,
               and
               the
               large
               Commentarie
               of
               Spondanus
               .
               
            
             
               For
               the
               best
               and
               fittest
               Authors
               in
               Prose
               to
               be
               read
               in
               Schooles
               ,
               
               as
               namely
               
                 Isocrates
                 ad
                 Daemonicum
              
               ,
               are
               the
               translations
               of
               Wolphius
               :
               and
               also
               of
               
                 Rodolphus
                 Agricola
              
               :
               and
               like
               wise
               the
               translation
               of
               
                 Antonius
                 Scorus
              
               ,
               with
               his
               annotations
               adioyned
               to
               his
               booke
               
                 De
                 ratione
                 discendi
                 ▪
                 linguae
                 Graecae
                 .
              
            
             
               2.
               
               For
               Zenophon
               ,
               
               the
               translation
               of
               his
               3.
               first
               bookes
               
                 de
                 Cyri
                 vita
                 &
                 disciplina
              
               .
            
             
               For
               more
               speedy
               reading
               the
               Greeke
               Testament
               ,
               
               Pasors
               Dictionary
               gathered
               of
               purpose
               to
               that
               end
               .
               What
               is
               defectiue
               may
               be
               supplied
               by
               the
               
                 Fundamentum
                 ,
                 Piscator
              
               and
               others
               .
            
          
           
             
               VVriting
               in
               Greeke
               .
            
             
               For
               writing
               exercises
               in
               Greeke
               ,
               
               or
               translating
               into
               Greeke
               :
               besides
               ,
               the
               
                 Clauis
                 linguae
                 Graecae
              
               for
               words
               ,
               and
               also
               Thomas
               his
               Dictionarie
               ,
               for
               phrase
               you
               may
               vse
               Garthius
               his
               Lexicon
               :
               and
               withall
               for
               prose
               
                 Poselii
                 Calligraphia
                 :
                 Elegantiae
                 Graecae
              
               by
               Vollandus
               .
            
             
               In
               verse
               for
               Epithets
               and
               Authorities
               ,
               
               Dinnerus
               his
               Greeke
               Epithets
               .
            
             
               For
               morall
               matter
               in
               Greeke
               ,
               
               with
               excellent
               sentences
               and
               discourses
               out
               of
               all
               the
               ancient
               and
               best
               Greeke
               Authors
               ,
               for
               the
               vse
               of
               Translations
               ,
               Theames
               ,
               Verses
               ,
               Declamations
               or
               Orations
               .
            
             
               
                 Stobaei
                 sententiae
              
               ,
               called
               Anthologia
               ;
               or
               Cornucopia
               of
               the
               largest
               .
            
          
           
             
               Speaking
               Greeke
               .
            
             
               For
               speaking
               of
               ordinarie
               matters
               in
               Greeke
               ,
               
               Poselius
               his
               Dialogues
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               Hebrue
               .
            
             
               For
               a
               most
               speedy
               attaining
               to
               the
               Hebrue
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               For
               the
               Grammar
               ,
               
               though
               euery
               one
               may
               take
               for
               his
               owne
               vse
               what
               Grammar
               he
               hath
               learned
               ,
               or
               is
               most
               familiarly
               acquainted
               with
               ,
               and
               supply
               out
               of
               others
               what
               is
               wanting
               therein
               ;
               yet
               for
               him
               that
               is
               newly
               to
               beginne
               ,
               or
               desires
               most
               easily
               to
               teach
               or
               direct
               others
               
               I
               take
               (
               vnder
               better
               iudgement
               )
               Martinius
               to
               be
               the
               best
               .
               My
               reasons
               are
               ,
            
             
               1.
               
               For
               that
               it
               is
               most
               methodicall
               ,
               
               proceeding
               according
               to
               the
               right
               order
               of
               Nature
               and
               rules
               of
               Art.
               
            
             
               2.
               
               For
               that
               it
               hath
               answering
               vnto
               it
               ,
               Maister
               Vdals
               Hebrue
               Grammar
               in
               English
               ,
               being
               in
               effect
               a
               meere
               translation
               of
               Martinius
               ,
               onely
               leauing
               out
               some
               things
               which
               he
               thought
               lesse
               necessary
               ,
               and
               making
               most
               things
               in
               Martinius
               very
               plaine
               ,
               in
               stead
               of
               a
               Commentary
               ,
               as
               the
               translations
               do
               the
               Authors
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               For
               that
               the
               Martinius
               Grammar
               printed
               by
               Raphalengius
               and
               by
               
                 Abrahamus
                 VVeerlinus
              
               at
               Berne
               ,
               haue
               a
               Praxis
               adioyned
               ,
               for
               the
               parsing
               of
               three
               
                 Psalmes
                 ,
                 viz.
              
               the
               1.
               25.
               and
               68
               ,
               like
               as
               Maister
               Vdals
               hath
               in
               English
               :
               which
               Praxis
               is
               so
               orderly
               for
               the
               right
               examining
               or
               analysing
               of
               euery
               word
               according
               to
               the
               order
               of
               nature
               and
               art
               ,
               and
               according
               as
               all
               things
               are
               set
               downe
               in
               the
               Grammar
               in
               order
               of
               the
               Chapters
               ,
               that
               they
               leade
               the
               learner
               directly
               ,
               as
               by
               the
               hand
               ,
               to
               the
               plaine
               parsing
               and
               resoluing
               of
               those
               three
               Psalmes
               ;
               and
               by
               them
               ,
               auy
               other
               part
               of
               the
               Hebrue
               Bible
               .
            
             
               And
               lastly
               ,
               for
               that
               Maister
               Vdals
               Grammar
               ,
               (
               which
               I
               commend
               as
               a
               short
               Commentarie
               to
               it
               )
               hath
               also
               a
               briefe
               Epitome
               of
               the
               Hebrue
               Lexicon
               adioyned
               ,
               for
               the
               more
               speedy
               finding
               out
               any
               word
               ,
               and
               so
               attaining
               the
               tongue
               .
            
             
             
               Or
               in
               stead
               of
               Martinius
               ,
               
               Maister
               Vdals
               Grammar
               it selfe
               ,
               which
               I
               finde
               to
               be
               farre
               more
               easie
               for
               the
               learner
               ,
               and
               much
               sooner
               gotten
               ,
               for
               the
               vse
               of
               it
               ,
               and
               also
               may
               be
               readily
               deliuered
               and
               vttered
               in
               Latine
               ,
               at
               least
               by
               comparing
               with
               Martinius
               .
            
             
               For
               the
               best
               Lexicon
               or
               Dictionarie
               ,
               
               Buxtorphius
               his
               Epitome
               for
               continuall
               vse
               :
               and
               also
               his
               Thesaurus
               for
               more
               exquisite
               knowledge
               :
               or
               ,
            
             
               For
               giuing
               the
               Hebrue
               words
               to
               the
               Latine
               ;
               
                 Lexicon
                 Latino-Hebraicum
              
               ,
               in
               the
               end
               of
               the
               Epitome
               of
               Pagnine
               by
               Raphalengius
               .
            
             
               For
               helpe
               for
               construing
               ,
               and
               so
               reading
               priuately
               ,
               and
               knowing
               the
               Radices
               .
            
             
               The
               Interlineal
               Bible
               ,
               by
               
                 Arias
                 Montanus
              
               .
            
             
               For
               the
               Psalmes
               ,
               
               Tossanus
               may
               affoord
               some
               helpe
               .
            
          
           
             
               English.
               
            
             
               Concerning
               our
               owne
               language
               ,
               
               whereas
               some
               great
               learned
               ,
               haue
               much
               and
               long
               complained
               ,
               that
               in
               most
               Schooles
               there
               hath
               bene
               litle
               care
               ,
               to
               teach
               Scholars
               to
               expresse
               their
               mindes
               readily
               in
               proprietie
               and
               puritie
               of
               speech
               ,
               so
               to
               helpe
               to
               adorne
               our
               owne
               tongue
               ;
               whereof
               wee
               haue
               continuall
               practise
               ,
               to
               the
               end
               that
               they
               may
               grow
               herein
               with
               the
               Latine
               and
               other
               learned
               tongues
               ,
               God
               hath
               prouided
               these
               helpes
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               The
               vse
               of
               the
               grammaticall
               translations
               (
               hauing
               to
               that
               end
               ,
               
               both
               proprietie
               and
               also
               varietie
               of
               words
               and
               phrase
               to
               expresse
               the
               minde
               )
               may
               be
               a
               good
               entrance
               for
               the
               yonger
               sort
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               After
               them
               ,
               
               all
               the
               other
               translations
               ,
               vsed
               onely
               in
               such
               sort
               ,
               as
               hath
               bene
               and
               shall
               be
               further
               shewed
               in
               the
               Grammar
               schoole
               ;
               so
               to
               ascend
               to
               those
               who
               haue
               written
               most
               exquisitely
               in
               that
               kinde
               of
               Translation
               .
            
             
             
               3.
               
               Dictionaries
               ,
               
               where
               fit
               words
               are
               wanting
               ,
               to
               make
               choise
               of
               those
               English
               words
               in
               them
               which
               best
               agree
               to
               the
               matter
               in
               hand
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               Adioyne
               to
               these
               ,
               
               for
               them
               who
               would
               grow
               to
               more
               exquisite
               perfection
               ,
               the
               bookes
               of
               such
               as
               haue
               written
               the
               purest
               style
               in
               English
               in
               each
               faculty
               ,
               which
               they
               purpose
               to
               exercise
               themselues
               in
               .
            
             
               For
               strangers
               ,
               
               who
               vnderstand
               the
               Latine
               tongue
               ,
               at
               least
               in
               some
               sort
               ,
               and
               would
               learne
               our
               tongue
               themselues
               ,
               or
               would
               teach
               it
               vnto
               others
               publiquely
               or
               priuately
               ,
               besides
               the
               former
               helpes
               for
               reading
               English.
               
            
             
               1.
               
               The
               English
               Grammar
               ,
               
               called
               
                 Grammatica
                 Anglicana
              
               ,
               a
               little
               Epitome
               written
               according
               to
               the
               rules
               of
               Art
               ,
               by
               
                 P.
                 Gr.
              
               printed
               at
               
                 Cambridge
                 Anno
              
               1594.
               
            
             
               2.
               
               
                 Logonomia
                 Anglica
              
               ,
               
               by
               Maister
               Gill
               Schoole-maister
               of
               Paules
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               Translations
               ,
               first
               grammaticall
               ;
               which
               leade
               the
               Scholar
               directly
               to
               learne
               our
               tongue
               ;
               after
               other
               translations
               ,
               
               and
               so
               the
               best
               English
               Authors
               and
               Dictionaries
               as
               before
               .
            
          
           
             
               Rhetoricke
               .
            
             
               For
               Rhetoricke
               ,
               
               so
               farre
               as
               shall
               be
               necessary
               for
               the
               Grammar-schoole
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               For
               Tropes
               and
               Figures
               of
               Rhetoricke
               ,
               and
               so
               for
               other
               figures
               of
               Grammar
               ,
               Maister
               Farnabees
               Tropes
               and
               figures
               ,
               so
               shortly
               comprized
               in
               verse
               ,
               as
               that
               they
               may
               be
               most
               easily
               gotten
               in
               a
               very
               little
               time
               ,
               and
               so
               likewise
               kept
               in
               memorie
               ,
               to
               serue
               for
               euery
               good
               vse
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               For
               a
               more
               full
               vnderstanding
               of
               that
               little
               booke
               ,
               
               and
               of
               all
               other
               matters
               belonging
               to
               Rhetoricke
               ,
               as
               for
               a
               methodicall
               handling
               ,
               and
               short
               comprizing
               of
               the
               whole
               Art
               ,
               by
               precepts
               ,
               illustrations
               by
               examples
               ,
               and
               the
               like
               .
            
             
             
               M.
               Butlers
               Rhetorick
               of
               Magd.
               colledge
               in
               Oxf.
               with
               a
               short
               commentary
               adioyned
               ,
               now
               the
               4.
               time
               printed
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               For
               the
               vse
               of
               Rhetoricke
               ,
               
               viz.
               for
               the
               practise
               thereef
               in
               Theames
               ,
               Declamatious
               ,
               Orations
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               The
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               or
               
                 Manuductio
                 ad
                 artem
                 Rhetoricam
              
               ,
               by
               Maister
               Vicars
               of
               Queenes
               Colledge
               in
               Oxford
               .
            
          
           
             
               Religion
               .
            
             
               Concerning
               Religion
               ;
               
               for
               laying
               surely
               the
               first
               grounds
               of
               our
               holy
               Religion
               in
               Schooles
               ,
               according
               to
               our
               good
               lawes
               ;
               and
               for
               seasoning
               the
               first
               and
               tender
               yeares
               of
               our
               children
               therewith
               :
               (
               wherein
               the
               Iesuites
               shall
               rise
               in
               iudgement
               against
               vs
               ,
               being
               farre
               more
               vigilant
               and
               industrious
               to
               destroy
               ,
               then
               we
               to
               saue
               ;
               to
               ouerthrow
               the
               Gospell
               ,
               then
               wee
               to
               propagate
               and
               spreade
               it
               .
               )
            
             
               1.
               
               To
               the
               end
               that
               Scholars
               may
               speedily
               get
               and
               euer
               keepe
               in
               fresh
               memorie
               with
               ease
               and
               delight
               ,
               
               the
               whole
               summe
               of
               the
               sacred
               story
               ,
               viz.
               the
               holie
               Bible
               ,
               (
               being
               the
               sole
               foundation
               of
               our
               Religion
               ,
               )
               and
               so
               the
               summe
               of
               euery
               Chapter
               therein
               ;
               wherby
               they
               may
               become
               sound
               Christians
               ,
               and
               in
               time
               (
               through
               the
               Lords
               blessing
               )
               admirable
               Diuines
               ,
               God
               hath
               prouided
               a
               litle
               Booke
               called
               
                 Bibliorum
                 summula
              
               ,
               which
               comprizeth
               the
               arguments
               or
               sums
               of
               euery
               Chapter
               of
               the
               whole
               Bible
               in
               Disticks
               ,
               viz.
               each
               Chapter
               in
               two
               verses
               ,
               beginning
               alphabetically
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               be
               more
               happily
               committed
               to
               memorie
               ,
               and
               recalled
               more
               easily
               when
               they
               are
               forgotten
               .
            
             
               This
               booke
               is
               most
               painefully
               and
               profitably
               composed
               in
               a
               familiar
               and
               easie
               verse
               ,
               by
               Maister
               Shaw
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               contents
               of
               the
               seuerall
               Chapters
               .
               
            
             
               Hereunto
               is
               adioyned
               in
               the
               end
               ,
               for
               further
               helpe
               of
               memorie
               ,
               the
               same
               contriued
               farre
               more
               briefly
               ,
               viz.
               
               in
               a
               very
               few
               verses
               :
               as
               namely
               Genesis
               hauing
               fiftie
               Disticks
               in
               the
               Summula
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               fifty
               Chapters
               ,
               is
               comprized
               in
               ten
               verses
               ,
               euery
               verse
               whereof
               comprehends
               fiue
               Chapters
               ,
               &
               almost
               euery
               word
               notes
               a
               seuerall
               Chapter
               ;
               thus
               notably
               deuised
               by
               
                 Math.
                 Martinius
              
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               For
               the
               first
               principles
               or
               iudiments
               in
               Religion
               ,
               
               to
               be
               taught
               in
               Catechizing
               ;
               and
               for
               building
               soundly
               vpon
               the
               sacred
               Scriptures
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               doctrine
               of
               our
               Church
               :
               besides
               our
               ordinary
               Catechismes
               by
               Law
               established
               ,
               for
               a
               further
               vnfolding
               and
               demonstrating
               of
               the
               principles
               out
               of
               the
               expresse
               texts
               of
               the
               Word
               ,
               Maister
               Perkins
               six
               Principles
               expounded
               ,
               with
               many
               other
               ,
               and
               chiefly
               such
               briefe
               ones
               ,
               as
               by
               their
               oftest
               printing
               do
               testifie
               the
               greatest
               liking
               ,
               and
               most
               generall
               approbation
               of
               the
               godly
               learned
               .
            
          
           
             
               VVriting
               .
            
             
               For
               faire
               writing
               in
               our
               owne
               ,
               
               and
               all
               the
               chiefe
               learned
               tongues
               .
            
             
               Copie
               bookes
               ,
               prepared
               of
               purpose
               for
               the
               Grammar-schooles
               ,
               as
               in
               Secretarie
               for
               our
               English
               ,
               so
               for
               the
               Latine
               ,
               Greeke
               and
               Hebrew
               ,
               together
               with
               directions
               for
               writing
               in
               the
               beginning
               of
               them
               ,
               printed
               by
               Maister
               
                 Thomas
                 Man
              
               ;
               whereby
               all
               Scholars
               ,
               well
               entred
               and
               practized
               from
               their
               beginning
               ,
               euery
               day
               a
               little
               ,
               may
               come
               to
               write
               commendably
               ,
               and
               many
               of
               them
               verie
               faire
               euery
               of
               these
               hands
               ,
               without
               hindering
               their
               learning
               ,
               as
               is
               proued
               by
               experience
               .
            
          
           
             
               Memorie
               .
            
             
               For
               the
               helpe
               of
               Memorie
               ,
               
               besides
               all
               directions
               for
               briefe
               summes
               of
               euery
               matter
               ,
               as
               are
               set
               downe
               in
               their
               places
               in
               the
               Grammar●schoole
               and
               others
               ;
               and
               besides
               diuers
               good
               rules
               and
               precepts
               for
               memorie
               in
               a
               little
               booke
               called
               
                 The
                 Castle
                 of
                 Memorie
              
               ,
               
               Chap.
               6.
               
            
             
               Maister
               VVillies
               his
               booke
               of
               Memorie
               ,
               called
               
                 Mnemonica
                 
                 siue
                 Reminiscendi
              
               ,
               are
               gathered
               out
               of
               the
               best
               who
               haue
               written
               thereof
               :
               out
               of
               which
               the
               most
               profitable
               things
               may
               be
               selected
               and
               vsed
               by
               them
               who
               are
               judicious
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             Other
             Bookes
             and
             helps
             ,
             
             some
             of
             them
             readie
             for
             the
             Presse
             ,
             others
             in
             good
             forwardnesse
             to
             be
             soone
             prepared
             ,
             if
             they
             shall
             be
             generally
             desired
             ,
             and
             the
             desire
             signified
             to
             the
             Stationers
             ,
             as
             necessarie
             or
             profitable
             for
             the
             ends
             for
             which
             they
             haue
             bene
             trauelled
             in
             ,
             as
             namely
             ;
          
           
             1
             FOr
             furnishing
             with
             fit
             matter
             for
             Theams
             in
             Prose
             or
             Verse
             ,
             
             Latine
             and
             Greeke
             ,
             which
             so
             troubleth
             young
             scholars
             ,
             and
             discourageth
             them
             ,
             
             for
             that
             they
             know
             not
             where
             to
             finde
             such
             fit
             matter
             for
             them
             ,
             and
             must
             needes
             be
             very
             difficult
             before
             a
             great
             deale
             of
             reading
             and
             practise
             ;
             there
             is
             an
             Index
             or
             booke
             of
             References
             ,
             gathered
             out
             of
             their
             Schoole-authors
             and
             others
             ,
             onely
             pointing
             at
             the
             places
             where
             to
             finde
             them
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             For
             patterns
             for
             Theames
             ,
             
             Tullies
             Paradoxes
             translated
             grammatically
             ,
             with
             a
             short
             Analysis
             in
             the
             margent
             ,
             whereby
             they
             may
             be
             learned
             more
             perfectly
             ,
             and
             vnderstood
             more
             fully
             to
             that
             end
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             For
             direction
             and
             patterns
             for
             writing
             pithy
             and
             short
             letters
             in
             English
             ,
             which
             is
             amongst
             vs
             ,
             both
             most
             
             commendable
             ,
             and
             of
             principall
             and
             daily
             vse
             .
             The
             Laconicall
             Epistles
             ,
             translated
             into
             a
             good
             English
             style
             ,
             with
             the
             Grammar
             order
             and
             propriety
             in
             the
             margents
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             For
             the
             more
             speedy
             and
             profitable
             learning
             the
             
               Ianua
               linguarum
            
             for
             euery
             good
             vse
             ;
             
             whereas
             now
             ,
             the
             English
             ,
             in
             many
             places
             keepeth
             onely
             the
             sense
             ,
             but
             varieth
             both
             from
             the
             verball
             and
             Grammar
             order
             ,
             and
             also
             from
             the
             propriety
             of
             the
             words
             in
             the
             Latin
             ,
             wherby
             the
             learners
             are
             oft
             exceedingly
             puzled
             and
             carried
             amisse
             :
             there
             ●s
             prouided
             a
             grammaticall
             translation
             to
             be
             set
             in
             the
             margen●s
             in
             the
             English
             ,
             to
             carry
             the
             learner
             aright
             ,
             both
             for
             proprietie
             and
             Grammar
             .
             And
             also
             in
             the
             Index
             or
             Table
             ,
             are
             set
             downe
             the
             declining
             of
             the
             Nownes
             and
             Verbs
             ,
             with
             the
             Genders
             of
             the
             Nownes
             ,
             to
             serue
             in
             〈◊〉
             of
             a
             Dictionarie
             for
             all
             of
             them
             :
             and
             withall
             ,
             both
             the
             doubtfull
             quantities
             ,
             and
             likewise
             the
             Etymologies
             or
             notations
             of
             the
             words
             briefly
             ,
             being
             examined
             by
             comparing
             the
             best
             Authors
             in
             that
             kinde
             ,
             and
             conference
             with
             other
             learned
             .
          
           
             So
             that
             the
             learner
             may
             soone
             runne
             through
             it
             ,
             to
             get
             both
             English
             by
             the
             Latine
             ,
             and
             Latine
             by
             the
             English
             ,
             with
             certainty
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             other
             vses
             mentioned
             .
          
           
             For
             furnishing
             with
             
             Terence
             ●phrase
             ,
             with
             the
             best
             matter
             ,
             
               Terentianus
               Christianus
            
             ,
             translated
             grammatically
             .
          
           
             
               For
               the
               Greeke
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               For
               getting
               speedily
               the
               Greeke
               Radices
               or
               Primitiues
               ,
               
               the
               
                 Clauis
                 linguae
                 Graece
              
               is
               made
               much
               more
               plaine
               ,
               easie
               and
               profitable
               ;
               first
               ,
               by
               the
               Latine
               set
               in
               the
               margent
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               Greeke
               ,
               answering
               word
               for
               word
               in
               such
               places
               where
               it
               now
               differs
               ,
               and
               the
               whole
               Latine
               sentences
               to
               be
               placed
               in
               the
               page
               opposite
               to
               the
               Greeke
               ,
               to
               leade
               the
               learner
               rightly
               by
               the
               
               hand
               to
               the
               knowledge
               of
               the
               Greeke
               ,
               whereas
               now
               many
               of
               the
               Sentences
               in
               Latine
               do
               onely
               expresse
               the
               sense
               ,
               and
               so
               set
               the
               learner
               at
               a
               stand
               ,
               or
               carry
               him
               quite
               amisse
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               By
               the
               principall
               Etymologies
               set
               in
               the
               margent
               of
               the
               Greeke
               Sentences
               ,
               directed
               with
               letters
               to
               know
               them
               speedily
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               By
               a
               grammaticall
               construction
               of
               the
               same
               in
               English
               ,
               answering
               the
               Greeke
               so
               neare
               as
               may
               be
               ,
               adioyned
               in
               the
               end
               of
               the
               Clauis
               ,
               with
               proprietie
               and
               varietie
               of
               the
               sense
               in
               the
               margents
               .
               By
               the
               h●lpe
               whereof
               (
               as
               experience
               will
               soone
               shew
               )
               all
               the
               Sentences
               may
               be
               gotten
               in
               a
               very
               little
               time
               ,
               both
               for
               Latine
               and
               Greeke
               ,
               by
               studying
               them
               out
               of
               the
               English
               ,
               onely
               helped
               by
               looking
               vpon
               the
               Greeke
               and
               Latin
               ,
               as
               need
               requireth
               ;
               to
               be
               able
               thereby
               to
               giue
               the
               Greeke
               and
               Latine
               words
               to
               the
               English
               ,
               and
               contrarily
               ,
               so
               to
               serue
               for
               any
               good
               vse
               thereof
               :
               and
               euer
               easily
               by
               this
               means
               to
               keepe
               all
               perfectly
               ,
               without
               any
               trouble
               or
               charge
               of
               memorie
               ,
               through
               the
               help
               of
               the
               perfect
               vnderstanding
               of
               it
               by
               this
               translation
               .
            
             
               Also
               for
               the
               easier
               entrance
               of
               the
               young
               Scholar
               to
               runne
               cheerefully
               and
               speedily
               through
               the
               best
               Greeke
               Authors
               in
               prose
               ,
               
               as
               well
               as
               in
               verse
               ,
               is
               prepared
               
                 Isocrates
                 ad
                 Daemonicum
              
               ,
               translated
               both
               in
               Latine
               grammatically
               ;
               and
               also
               with
               another
               translation
               in
               a
               more
               pure
               Latine
               style
               .
            
             
               So
               likewise
               the
               first
               booke
               of
               
                 Zenophons
                 Cyropaideia
              
               in
               like
               manner
               .
            
             
               Which
               three
               bookes
               being
               well
               gone
               through
               ,
               
               scholars
               will
               easily
               and
               speedily
               run
               through
               all
               other
               Greek
               Authors
               ,
               by
               the
               ordinarie
               helpes
               of
               translations
               ,
               and
               the
               like
               meanes
               which
               God
               hath
               so
               bountifully
               prouided
               
               for
               this
               last
               Age
               ,
               especially
               if
               they
               haue
               said
               a
               good
               foundation
               in
               the
               Grammar
               first
               .
            
          
           
             
               Hebrue
               .
            
             
               For
               laying
               speedily
               a
               sure
               foundation
               ;
               
               first
               ,
               for
               the
               right
               knowledge
               of
               all
               the
               Hebrue
               Primitiues
               in
               their
               first
               and
               proper
               signification
               ;
               secondly
               ,
               by
               what
               Tropes
               their
               significations
               are
               changed
               into
               other
               senses
               :
               and
               so
               thirdly
               ,
               by
               what
               reasons
               or
               notations
               all
               their
               deriuatiues
               and
               issue
               come
               thereof
               :
               and
               finally
               ,
               for
               getting
               speedily
               all
               the
               Hebrue
               Primitiues
               without
               booke
               ;
               and
               with
               the
               getting
               of
               them
               ,
               to
               learne
               also
               so
               much
               of
               the
               Hebrue
               Bible
               in
               most
               profitable
               matters
               and
               sentences
               ,
               there
               hath
               bene
               long
               thought
               of
               ,
               and
               is
               now
               in
               preparing
               .
            
             
               First
               ,
               a
               briefe
               Hebrue
               Lexicon
               ,
               after
               the
               manner
               of
               the
               
                 Fundamentum
                 linguae
                 Graecae
              
               .
            
             
               And
               secondly
               ,
               another
               little
               booke
               after
               the
               manner
               of
               
                 Clauis
                 linguae
                 Graecae
              
               ,
               wherein
               all
               ,
               or
               most
               of
               the
               Hebrue
               Primitiues
               are
               to
               be
               comprized
               ,
               in
               certaine
               choise
               sentences
               of
               the
               sacred
               Scriptures
               ,
               of
               sundry
               kindes
               of
               matt●r
               .
            
             
               This
               may
               be
               called
               fi●ly
               
                 Ianua
                 linguae
                 Hebraicae
              
               ;
               the
               other
               ,
               the
               Clauis
               vnto
               it
               .
            
             
               As
               these
               two
               may
               be
               of
               notable
               vse
               ,
               to
               make
               speedily
               perfect
               Hebricians
               ,
               and
               likewise
               to
               helpe
               to
               prepare
               the
               way
               to
               the
               calling
               of
               the
               Iewes
               thereby
               ,
               so
               they
               require
               the
               cunningest
               workemen
               for
               the
               more
               curious
               framing
               and
               finishing
               of
               them
               :
               whom
               God
               hath
               also
               prouided
               ,
               if
               some
               noble
               minded
               fauourers
               of
               good
               learning
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               Church
               of
               Christ
               ,
               will
               but
               a
               little
               lay
               to
               their
               helping
               hands
               ,
               for
               defraying
               the
               charges
               of
               their
               maintenance
               ,
               till
               they
               shall
               be
               able
               to
               go
               through
               the
               worke
               ,
               to
               bring
               them
               to
               perfection
               ,
               for
               the
               full
               accomplishment
               
               of
               all
               the
               good
               therein
               desired
               .
            
             
               For
               all
               these
               bookes
               and
               helpes
               more
               particularly
               ,
               
               and
               for
               the
               right
               vse
               of
               euery
               of
               them
               ,
               and
               how
               to
               auoid
               all
               the
               abuses
               and
               other
               in
               conueniences
               ;
               and
               so
               for
               attaining
               all
               those
               parts
               or
               learning
               mentioned
               in
               the
               Contents
               ,
               see
               the
               Booke
               called
               〈…〉
               ,
               or
               the
               Grammar-schoole
               in
               this
               second
               Edition
               :
               where
               ,
               in
               a
               familiar
               Dialogue
               betweene
               two
               Schoole-maisters
               all
               these
               things
               are
               full
               discussed
               and
               set
               foorth
               ,
               and
               yet
               the
               booke
               in
               many
               things
               abridged
               ,
               and
               made
               lesse
               then
               before
               .
            
             
               For
               matter
               of
               charges
               to
               prouide
               so
               many
               helpes
               ,
               
               the
               gaining
               of
               one
               yeares
               learning
               will
               plentifully
               recompence
               ,
               if
               we
               vse
               onely
               the
               necessarie
               :
               and
               all
               the
               other
               benefits
               be
               a
               sufficient
               ouerplus
               .
            
             
               For
               all
               other
               obiections
               ,
               I
               referre
               you
               likewise
               to
               the
               Grammar-schoole
               ,
               where
               (
               I
               hope
               )
               you
               shall
               see
               your selfe
               well
               satisfied
               in
               all
               .
               And
               what
               is
               still
               wanting
               ,
               I
               trust
               the
               same
               good
               hand
               of
               our
               God
               will
               ,
               in
               his
               due
               time
               ,
               f●●ly
               supply
               .
            
             
               FINIS
               .
            
          
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
           ❧
           The
           Examiners
           Censure
           :
           
             March.
             16.
             1620.
             
          
        
         
           WHere
           as
           this
           Author
           ,
           still
           desirous
           to
           communicate
           all
           the
           new
           comforts
           ,
           which
           God
           hath
           vouchs●fed
           him
           in
           his
           long
           and
           painefull
           trauels
           ,
           for
           the
           generall
           good
           ,
           and
           specially
           for
           our
           Grammar-schooles
           ;
           and
           fearing
           lest
           in
           anie
           matter
           he
           should
           deceiue
           himselfe
           or
           others
           ,
           hath
           intreated
           vs
           to
           make
           some
           further
           triall
           of
           the
           things
           which
           he
           hath
           written
           h●rein
           ,
           for
           the
           better
           confirmation
           of
           himselfe
           and
           of
           all
           others
           ;
           we
           could
           not
           denie
           his
           so
           honest
           a
           request
           .
           Therefore
           〈…〉
           Labours
           in
           this
           kinde
           ,
           by
           〈…〉
           of
           Worcester
           ,
           at
           the
           first
           〈◊〉
           of
           his
           Gramm●r-schoole
           ,
           as
           appeares
           in
           the
           〈…〉
           Preface
           before
           it
           ,
           and
           by
           other
           〈◊〉
           since
           ;
           yet
           now
           that
           it
           is
           to
           come
           foorth
           〈…〉
           ,
           much
           more
           compleate
           and
           perfect
           after
           so
           much
           long
           trauell
           and
           experience
           )
           we
           haue
           her●upon
           made
           new
           and
           further
           triall
           accordingly
           .
           In
           which
           we
           haue
           
           found
           so
           much
           content
           in
           euery
           forme
           ,
           from
           the
           lowest
           to
           the
           highest
           ,
           for
           the
           time
           which
           we
           then
           had
           ,
           as
           perswaded
           vs
           of
           the
           trueth
           of
           whatsoeuer
           he
           hath
           written
           concerning
           the
           same
           ;
           and
           giues
           vs
           withall
           much
           assurance
           of
           a
           very
           great
           blessing
           to
           be
           hoped
           for
           ,
           both
           to
           Church
           and
           Common-wealth
           in
           all
           places
           for
           which
           he
           hath
           trauelled
           ,
           by
           these
           his
           happie
           Labours
           rightly
           put
           in
           practise
           :
           which
           all
           well-willers
           to
           Religion
           and
           Learning
           are
           to
           wish
           to
           their
           Countrey
           ,
           and
           by
           all
           meanes
           to
           promote
           ,
           for
           the
           good
           of
           the
           present
           and
           of
           all
           succeeding
           ages
           .
        
         
           
             IAMES
             VSSHER
             Doctour
             and
             Professor
             of
             Diuinitie
             in
             the
             Vniuersitie
             of
             Dublin
             .
          
           
             DANIEL
             FEATLY
             Doctour
             of
             Diuinity
             ,
             and
             Chaplin
             in
             house
             to
             his
             Grace
             of
             Canterburie
             .
          
        
         
      
       
         Notes, typically marginal, from the original text
         
           Notes for div A16864-e180
           
             2.
             
             Thes.
             1.
             8
             ,
             9
             
          
           
             Luke
             16.
             24.
             ●
             
          
           
             〈…〉
             
          
           
             1
             Pet.
             4.
             18
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A16864-e560
           
             Occasion
             of
             this
             worke
             .
          
           
             The
             vsuall
             complaints
             against
             non-proficiencie
             in
             schooles
             .
          
           
             Where
             good
             is
             done
             ,
             how
             hardly
             it
             is
             effected
             commonly
             .
          
           
             A
             chief
             cause
             hereof
             ,
             want
             of
             knowledge
             of
             a
             right
             course
             of
             teaching
             .
          
           
             The
             authors
             desire
             to
             help
             all
             this
             .
          
           
             And
             to
             procure
             a
             perpetuall
             benefite
             to
             all
             posteritie
             .
          
           
             Of
             the
             rare
             benefits
             of
             learning
             no
             good
             man
             euer
             doubted
             
          
           
             The
             licenciousnesse
             of
             some
             learned
             or
             abusers
             of
             learning
             ,
             ought
             not
             to
             cause
             vs
             to
             thinke
             the
             worse
             therof
             .
          
           
             Iob.
             3.
             19.
             2.
             
             Thes.
             2.
             10.
             
          
           
             Learning
             is
             the
             glorie
             of
             man
             ,
             in
             the
             verie
             naturall
             mans
             account
             
          
           
             Prou.
             4.
             7.
             
          
           
             The
             first
             and
             principall
             meanes
             of
             good
             learning
             ,
             the
             schooles
             of
             learning
             .
          
           
             In
             what
             schooles
             the
             best
             learning
             &
             nurture
             are
             to
             be
             found
             .
          
           
             A
             wonderfull
             differēce
             betweene
             those
             scholes
             wherin
             the
             best
             orders
             are
             obserued
             ,
             &
             the
             rest
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             The
             matter
             of
             learning
             easie
             in
             such
             schooles
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             The
             maner
             of
             proceeding
             in
             a
             singular
             order
             without
             confusion
             .
          
           
             The
             painefull
             schoolmaster
             may
             there
             expect
             a
             rich
             blessing
             .
          
           
             The
             fruite
             hereof
             able
             to
             encourage
             each
             Maister
             to
             take
             the
             vttermost
             paines
             to
             follow
             the
             best
             manner
             .
          
           
             Hence
             wil
             ensue
             a
             maruellous
             chāge
             in
             schooles
             .
          
           
             The
             bringing
             learning
             into
             esteeme
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             it
             to
             be
             desired
             ,
             &
             honored
             of
             al
             ▪
             
          
           
             The
             stirring
             vp
             many
             benefactors
             to
             learning
             .
          
           
             Things
             accompanying
             a
             right
             course
             in
             proceeding
             .
          
           
             Deliuery
             of
             the
             maisters
             from
             much
             vexation
             and
             ouermuch
             seueritie
             .
             Of
             scholars
             from
             terrour
             .
          
           
             That
             all
             things
             in
             schooles
             may
             be
             done
             with
             delight
             and
             comfort
             .
          
           
             More
             substantiall
             learning
             in
             such
             at
             7.
             yeares
             ▪
             then
             in
             others
             atten
             .
          
           
             State
             of
             most
             schooles
             and
             scholars
             of
             15.
             yeares
             of
             age
             .
          
           
             Vnfit
             for
             the
             Vniuersities
             .
          
           
             Euils
             in
             their
             entrance
             and
             continuance
             in
             the
             Vniuersities
             .
          
           
             Tutors
             must
             playe
             the
             schoolmasters
             if
             euer
             they
             shall
             do
             good
             .
          
           
             Such
             scholars
             must
             vse
             extraordinarie
             paines
             .
          
           
             And
             doing
             best
             ,
             shall
             yet
             euer
             feele
             the
             want
             of
             the
             Grammar
             schoole
             .
          
           
             If
             the
             best
             orders
             were
             had
             the
             schooles
             should
             be
             as
             the
             bee-hiues
             
          
           
             As
             the
             goodly
             gardens
             &
             sweet
             singing
             birds
             .
          
           
             And
             generally
             excell
             thēselues
             .
          
           
             That
             wee
             should
             as
             much
             reioice
             in
             these
             ,
             as
             euer
             we
             grieued
             for
             the
             other
             .
          
           
             Maisters
             and
             schollars
             should
             proceed
             with
             all
             alacritie
             .
          
           
             Though
             all
             should
             not
             excell
             ,
             yet
             all
             should
             be
             fitted
             to
             some
             good
             emploiment
             ,
             for
             the
             benefit
             of
             the
             whole
             .
          
           
             All
             these
             ve●ied
             in
             some
             few
             schooles
             .
          
           
             This
             endeuor
             to
             di●charge
             a
             debt
             to
             all
             ,
             by
             making
             all
             sorts
             partakers
             of
             the
             blessings
             ,
             which
             he
             hath
             vouchsafed
             .
          
           
             Dutie
             to
             all
             in
             high
             place
             for
             their
             children
             and
             posteritie
             .
          
           
             Desire
             to
             all
             parents
             .
          
           
             To
             all
             more
             tender
             hearted
             parents
             .
          
           
             Wel-wishing
             to
             the
             poorer
             sort
             .
          
           
             To
             the
             schooles
             thēselues
             .
          
           
             To
             the
             Vniuersities
             .
          
           
             Loue
             to
             all
             who
             haue
             lost
             their
             learning
             to
             repaire
             it
             ,
             and
             recouer
             them selues
             .
          
           
             Matth.
             25.
             
          
           
             Desi●e
             to
             all
             functions
             .
          
           
             To
             all
             ruder
             places
             ,
             as
             to
             Wales
             ,
             to
             the
             Irish
             ,
             Virgi●ia
             the
             Sommerlland●
             .
          
           
             Maister
             Iohn
             Ireton
             of
             Legworth
             in
             Leicestershire
             .
          
           
             Ouid.
             
          
           
             Discharge
             of
             debt
             to
             all
             .
          
           
             That
             euerie
             one
             may
             pay
             the
             debt
             of
             his
             birth
             .
          
           
             For
             that
             none
             of
             vs
             are
             born
             to
             our selues
             .
          
           
             Learning
             being
             in
             reputation
             ,
             shall
             neuer
             want
             multitudes
             of
             benefactors
             .
          
           
             The
             chiefest
             glory
             in
             earth
             to
             be
             aduancers
             o●
             learning
             &
             piety
             .
          
           
             The
             glorie
             of
             our
             nation
             shal
             be
             increased
             as
             learning
             increaseth
             .
          
           
             A
             part
             of
             our
             happinesse
             to
             shew
             our
             loue
             in
             furthering
             so
             great
             a
             good
             .
          
           
             Why
             this
             work
             was
             the
             more
             hastned
             to
             the
             publike
             view
             .
          
           
             The
             vncertaintie
             of
             our
             liues
             ought
             to
             make
             vs
             to
             do
             all
             the
             good
             we
             can
             whiles
             we
             may
             .
          
           
             M.
             To●ey
             .
             M.
             Coote
             .
             M.
             Richardson
             
          
           
             We
             cannot
             appeare
             before
             our
             ●od
             ,
             if
             we
             haue
             not
             done
             our
             vttermost
             endeuour
             to
             pay
             our
             debts
             ,
             and
             to
             employ
             our
             talents
             to
             bring
             most
             aduantage
             to
             our
             maister
             .
          
           
             Considering
             well
             the
             industrie
             of
             our
             enemie
             .
          
           
             Witnesse
             for
             euer
             the
             powder
             fornace
             .
          
           
             This
             worke
             hath
             not
             bene
             set
             vpō
             rashly
             ,
             but
             vndertakē
             by
             an
             holy
             &
             warrantable
             calling
             .
          
           
             By
             special
             benefactors
             to
             schooles
             such
             who
             had
             author●●y
             to
             cōmand
             ●y
             seruice
             .
          
           
             The
             ●ight
             Hon.
             E
             of
             H.
             M.
             Iohnson
             Archdeacon
             of
             Leicestershire
             .
          
           
             From
             his
             Soueraigne
             Maiesties
             desire
             for
             all
             his
             ●hooles
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             manner
             of
             proceeding
             in
             this
             worke
             ,
             the
             Preface
             to
             our
             common
             Grammar
             doth
             direct
             it
             .
          
           
             Though
             many
             haue
             written
             hereof
             ,
             yet
             none
             haue
             proceeded
             in
             this
             particular
             manner
             for
             the
             helpe
             of
             he
             meanest
             .
          
           
             This
             worke
             hath
             not
             bene
             proceeded
             in
             by
             priuate
             conceit
             .
          
           
             Nor
             posted
             on
             ,
             but
             hastened
             slowly
             .
          
           
             The
             Author
             assumeth
             to
             himselfe
             onely
             the
             wants
             &
             errors
             .
          
           
             Prescribeth
             not
             to
             anie
             .
          
           
             Reasons
             for
             the
             length
             of
             the
             worke
             .
          
           
             Martial
             .
             Epig.
             
          
           
             *
             Master
             
               Iohn
               Ireton
            
             of
             Kegworth
             ,
             mentioned
             before
             .
          
           
             The
             vse
             of
             it
             to
             the
             learned
             ,
             who
             would
             not
             reade
             the
             whole
             .
          
           
             Better
             for
             the
             learners
             that
             the
             worke
             should
             be
             ouerlarge
             then
             too
             short
             .
          
           
             D●
             .
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             This
             trauell
             happily
             emploied
             ,
             if
             but
             to
             effect
             these
             things
             following
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             If
             but
             to
             set
             others
             on
             work
             hereby
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             Or
             to
             gain
             moe
             experiments
             ,
             which
             men
             are
             so
             hardly
             drawn
             to
             communicate
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             Or
             to
             make
             known
             sundrie
             most
             profitable
             bookes
             and
             helpes
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             To
             helpe
             all
             desirous
             to
             doe
             good
             ,
             and
             yet
             toyle
             without
             fruit
             .
          
           
             If
             but
             to
             gain
             one
             yeare
             .
          
           
             Thogh
             there
             may
             be
             hope
             of
             almost
             double
             sound
             learning
             ,
             to
             that
             which
             hath
             bene
             in
             manie
             rude
             places
             .
          
           
             For
             that
             so
             much
             may
             be
             gained
             by
             three
             or
             foure
             of
             these
             helps
             alone
             .
          
           
             Reason
             of
             the
             high
             account
             of
             grāmatical
             translations
             .
          
           
             Chap.
             8.
             
          
           
             Master
             Askams
             testimonie
             of
             the
             practise
             of
             translating
             .
          
           
             This
             is
             well
             worthie
             the
             marking
             of
             all
             .
          
           
             More
             speedily
             .
          
           
             This
             verie
             course
             in
             effect
             practised
             by
             Maister
             Askam
             .
          
           
             Experience
             of
             the
             singular
             benefit
             of
             it
             in
             Maister
             Iohn
             Whitne●
             .
          
           
             This
             way
             of
             translating
             the
             chiefe
             &
             sure
             meanes
             to
             attaine
             speedily
             to
             any
             tongue
             .
             Maister
             Askams
             Schoolemaster
             .
             Lib.
             2.
             p.
             33.
             
          
           
             A
             late
             known
             and
             worthie
             experience
             in
             a
             young
             Noble-man
             of
             rare
             hope
             .
          
           
             To
             whom
             the
             finding
             out
             of
             the
             rule
             ,
             and
             of
             translations
             thereby
             is
             acknowledged
             .
          
           
             Labour
             to
             find
             out
             the
             rule
             ▪
             and
             to
             frame
             the
             translations
             accordingly
             .
          
           
             And
             also
             the
             right
             vses
             &
             benefits
             of
             them
             .
          
           
             And
             finally
             ,
             to
             haue
             ●ull
             assurance
             of
             euery
             thing
             .
          
           
             Vpon
             what
             things
             all
             the
             chiefe
             benefits
             of
             these
             translations
             depend
             .
          
           
             Chap.
             8.
             
          
           
             Certaine
             benefits
             of
             these
             translations
             rightly
             vsed
             .
          
           
             Further
             Apologie
             needlesse
             ,
             except
             ,
             1.
             
             The
             Authors
             desire
             to
             do
             all
             this
             good
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             The
             hauing
             all
             these
             experiments
             gathered
             to
             our
             hands
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             Assurance
             of
             each
             mans
             affection
             ,
             to
             haue
             his
             child
             so
             brought
             vp
             as
             is
             here
             desired
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             For
             the
             testimonie
             of
             his
             cō●cience
             to
             be
             vpright
             &
             faithfull
             〈◊〉
             all
             his
             worke
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             Anno
             1588
             
          
           
             2.
             
             The
             death
             of
             Queene
             Elizabeth
             ,
             and
             peaceable
             bringing
             in
             our
             Soueraigne
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             Powder
             ●reason
             .
          
           
             5.
             
             For
             willing
             sub●ission
             of
             al●
             things
             to
             the
             publike
             cen●ure
             .
          
           
             And
             desire
             to
             be
             still
             learning
             of
             all
             .
          
           
             The
             cause
             of
             the
             confi●nt
             reioycing
             in
             it
             .
          
           
             Exhortation
             &
             encouragement
             to
             the
             weaker
             teachers
             .
          
           
             Griefe
             to
             all
             honest
             hearted
             maisters
             ,
             for
             complaints
             and
             murmurings
             against
             thē
             .
          
           
             Complaints
             of
             parents
             for
             the●●
             children
             not
             profiting
             .
          
           
             Murmurings
             of
             Townes
             for
             charges
             ill
             bestowed
             and
             children
             spoiled
             .
          
           
             Some
             to
             crie
             out
             against
             our
             seueritie
             .
          
           
             Scholars
             comming
             to
             mans
             estate
             to
             bewaile
             losse
             of
             their
             time
             .
          
           
             That
             they
             were
             not
             taught
             any
             religiou
             .
          
           
             Terrour
             for
             for
             lacke
             of
             growth
             of
             Gods
             religion
             .
          
           
             The
             charge
             committed
             to
             vs.
             
          
           
             The
             combinations
             of
             the
             Iesuites
             ought
             to
             prouoke
             vs.
             October
             ,
             28.
             1608.
             
          
           
             What
             our
             state
             was
             almost
             by
             them
             .
          
           
             Our
             miraculous
             preseruations
             ,
             and
             their
             deadly
             malice
             ,
             ought
             to
             put
             new
             life
             into
             euery
             one
             of
             vs.
             
          
           
             We
             haue
             no
             cause
             to
             fea●e
             our
             bloud-thirstie
             aduersaries
             ,
             if
             we
             will
             but
             sticke
             vnto
             our
             Christ.
             
          
           
             Our
             confidence
             in
             our
             Captaine
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             Thes.
             2.
             4.
             
          
           
             The
             power
             of
             our
             Christ
             ,
             with
             vs
             ,
             &
             certainety
             of
             victorie
             of
             his
             side
             .
          
           
             〈…〉
             
          
           
             〈…〉
             
          
           
             Assurance
             that
             we
             may
             come
             vnto
             them
             .
          
           
             An
             〈…〉
             to
             double
             ●u●
             diligence
             
          
           
             None
             to
             be
             discouraged
             ,
             if
             he
             see
             not
             his
             desire
             at
             the
             first
             .
          
           
             Christoph.
             Hegendorphinus
             L.
             E.
             discipulo
             suo
             ,
          
           
             2.
             
             For
             the
             speedy
             and
             profitable
             learning
             all
             our
             first
             and
             lowest
             school
             authors
             ,
             Gram.
             translations
             .
          
           
             Books
             grammatically
             translated
             .
          
           
             Plainnesse
             &
             readinesse
             of
             these
             translations
             .
          
           
             For
             a
             practise
             of
             the
             chiefe
             rules
             of
             construction
             ,
             Maister
             
               Leeches
               Dialogues
            
          
           
             For
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             lower
             Schoole-authors
             ,
             other
             translations
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             rest
             of
             Tullies
             Offices
             not
             translated
             grammatically
             ,
             M.
             Grimmalds
             translation
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             other
             parts
             adioyned
             to
             the
             Offices
             ,
             
               Tho.
               Newtons
            
             translation
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             rest
             of
             〈…〉
             
          
           
             Virg.
             a●neid
             Maister
             Phaer
             .
          
           
             For
             ●erence
             Maister
             B●rnards
             translation
             .
          
           
             Caution
             to
             be
             vsed
             in
             this
             and
             other
             authors
             .
          
           
             For
             higher
             Authors
             ,
             as
             
               Caesars
               Commentaries
            
             ,
             Sir
             
               Clement
               Edmunds
            
             his
             translation
             .
             This
             author
             ,
             with
             those
             which
             follow
             next
             ,
             are
             worthy
             workes
             for
             Noble
             Gentlemen
             and
             all
             other
             ,
             who
             would
             doe
             seruice
             to
             the
             Church
             of
             God
             ;
             and
             their
             natiue
             Countrey
             ,
             to
             bestow
             some
             of
             their
             trauels
             and
             idle
             houres
             in
             .
          
           
             For
             Lucans
             Pharsalia
             Sir
             Arthur
             Gorge
             .
          
           
             For
             Liuy
             D.
             Hollands
             translation
             .
          
           
             For
             Cornelius
             Tacitus
             ,
             Sir
             H.
             Sauill
             .
          
           
             Florus
             .
          
           
             Seneca
             .
          
           
             Comments
             ▪
             on
             all
             O●id
             .
             For
             the
             
               Metamorphosis
               Sabine
            
             .
          
           
             On
             Virgil
             ,
             Seruius
             Donate
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             Ramus
             ,
             on
             the
             Eclogues
             and
             Georgickes
             .
          
           
             Friskilines
             paraphrase
             .
          
           
             Meins
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             ancient
             Poets
             short
             and
             pithy
             commentaries
             .
          
           
             Maister
             
               Bonds
               ▪
            
          
           
             Maister
             Farn.
             
          
           
             For
             the
             Roman
             histories
             and
             antiquities
             Maister
             Goodwin
             his
             Anthologia
             .
          
           
             For
             Theams
             M.
             Vicars
             his
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             for
             inuention
             and
             manner
             .
          
           
             For
             matter
             ,
             
               Bibliotheca
               scholastica
            
             .
          
           
             Exampls
             ,
             Valerius
             Max.
             
          
           
             Stobaei
             Anthologia
             .
          
           
             Phrases
             for
             Theames
             .
          
           
             Drax
             his
             Calliepeia
             ,
             Maister
             Farnabees
             Phrases
             .
          
           
             Patterns
             for
             Epistles
             ,
             
               Laconicae
               Epistolae
            
             .
          
           
             Examples
             for
             imitation
             of
             Epistles
             of
             all
             sorts
             ,
             
               Flores
               &
               Sententiae
               scribendinque
               formulae
               illustres
               .
            
          
           
             Orations
             ,
             Melchior
             Iunius
             .
          
           
             Examining
             phrases
             in
             prose
             .
          
           
             Godscalcus
             .
          
           
             Schorus
             .
          
           
             Erasmus
             Epit.
             of
             Vallaes
             elegancies
             ,
             Popma
             .
          
           
             
               In
               Poetry
            
             .
             Text.
             Epith.
             Buchleri
             Thesaurus
             poëticus
             .
          
           
             Smetius
             .
          
           
             Dictionaries
             .
          
           
             Rider
             .
          
           
             Thomas
             Thomasius
             .
          
           
             For
             a
             short
             comprising
             of
             the
             Latine
             Primitiues
             ,
             
               Ianua
               linguarum
            
             .
          
           
             For
             resoluing
             authors
             ,
             Gram.
             trans
             .
             of
             &c.
             
          
           
             Disputation
             of
             Grammar
             questions
             ,
             in
             English
             ;
             Posing
             of
             the
             Parts
             .
          
           
             In
             Latine
             ,
             M.
             Stockwoods
             disput
             .
          
           
             Disputing
             of
             morall
             questions
             ,
             master
             Brasbridge
             questions
             of
             Tullies
             Off.
             
          
           
             For
             words
             belonging
             to
             Historie
             ,
             Trades
             ,
             &c.
             
               Stanbridg
               .
               vocabula
            
             .
          
           
             Hunters
             Cosmographie
             .
          
           
             How
             this
             might
             be
             more
             profitable
             .
          
           
             How
             such
             a
             worke
             might
             be
             easily
             compiled
             .
          
           
             How
             best
             learned
             .
          
           
             For
             speedy
             attaining
             to
             the
             Greeke
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             Grammar
             Maister
             Camdens
             most
             profitable
             for
             vs.
             
          
           
             For
             other
             difficulties
             concerning
             Grammar
             ,
             Cleonards
             Gram
             with
             Ant●sign
             .
          
           
             The
             short
             abridgement
             in
             the
             eud
             of
             Scapula
             .
          
           
             For
             speedy
             attaining
             the
             greeke
             Primitiues
             .
          
           
             Clauis
             〈◊〉
             Graecae
             .
          
           
             
               For
               a
               more
               full
               knowledge
               of
               thē
               ,
            
             Fundamētum
             linguae
             Graecae
             ,
             siue
             Epitome
             Lexici
             &
             Etymologici
             graeci
             proschola
             Br●mensi
             .
          
           
             Authors
             in
             verse
             ,
             
               Theognis
               ,
               &c.
            
             with
             Sylburgius
             .
          
           
             Hesiode
             with
             Ceporine
             &
             Melancth
             .
          
           
             For
             Homer
             .
          
           
             Maister
             Chapman
             in
             English
             meeter
             .
          
           
             Eustathius
             .
          
           
             Spondanus
             .
          
           
             For
             prose
             ▪
             Isocrates
             translated
             by
             
               VVolphius
               .
               Schorus
            
             his
             translation
             with
             annotat
             .
          
           
             Zenophons
             Cyropaideia
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             Greek
             Testament
             ,
             Pasors
             dictionarie
             .
          
           
             
               For
               writing
               in
               Greeke
            
             ,
             Clauis
             ,
             Thomas●●s
             ,
             Garthius
             .
             Poselij
             Calligr
             .
             Elegantiae
             graecae
             .
          
           
             In
             verse
             for
             Epithets
             and
             authorities
             ,
             Dinnerus
             .
          
           
             For
             morall
             matter
             out
             〈◊〉
             best
             Greeke
             Authors
             ,
             
               Stobaei
               Anthologia
               ,
               Cornucopia
            
             .
          
           
             For
             speaking
             Greeke
             ,
             Poselius
             .
          
           
             For
             Hebrue
             Grammar
             .
          
           
             Martinius
             printed
             by
             R●phalengius
             at
             Berne
             .
          
           
             Reason
             of
             it
             .
          
           
             Maister
             Vdals
             Grammar
             .
          
           
             Lexicon
             Buxtorphius
             .
          
           
             Tossanus
             .
          
           
             For
             our
             owne
             tongue
             to
             grow
             in
             proprietie
             and
             puritie
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             Grāmatical
             translations
             for
             all
             the
             first
             beginners
             .
          
           
             2
             Other
             translations
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             Dictionaries
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             Best
             authors
             in
             each
             kinde
             for
             English.
             
          
           
             For
             strangers
             .
          
           
             The
             English
             Grammar
             .
          
           
             Logonomia
             Anglica
             .
          
           
             Translations
             .
          
           
             For
             Tropes
             and
             Figures
             briefly
             in
             vse
             ,
             Maister
             Fa●nabees
             tropes
             and
             figures
             .
          
           
             For
             a
             more
             methodicall
             tractate
             ▪
             M.
             Butlers
             Rhetoricke
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             For
             the
             vse
             of
             Rhetorick
             ,
             Maister
             〈◊〉
             ,
             Manuductio
             ad
             artem
             Rhetoricum
             .
          
           
             Religion
             ,
             for
             laying
             surely
             the
             grounds
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             For
             know●edge
             of
             the
             historie
             of
             the
             Bible
             ,
             Bibliorum
             summula
             .
          
           
             A
             more
             brief
             abridgement
             
               Memoriale
               ,
               Biblicu●
            
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             p●inciples
             besides
             those
             by
             law
             appointed
             ,
             Maister
             Perkins
             ●ixe
             Principles
             expounded
             .
          
           
             For
             faire
             writing
             ,
             Copie
             bookes
             for
             Secretarie
             ,
             Romane
             ,
             Greeke
             ,
             Hebrue
             .
          
           
             For
             Memory
             .
          
           
             Maister
             Willies
             Mnemonica
             .
          
           
             Bookes
             prepared
             for
             the
             Presse
             .
          
           
             Helpe
             for
             matter
             for
             Theames
             .
          
           
             An
             Index
             gathered
             out
             of
             the
             fittest
             Schoole-authors
             and
             others
             ,
             with
             references
             to
             the
             places
             .
          
           
             Tullies
             paradoxes
             translated
             grammatically
             for
             patternes
             for
             Theames
             .
             The
             Laconicall
             Epistles
             translated
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             For
             the
             more
             speedie
             &
             〈◊〉
             learning
             〈…〉
             it
             is
             prepared
             to
             be
             〈◊〉
             ,
             printed
             as
             to
             supply
             what
             is
             wanting
             or
             Grammar
             order
             ,
             prop●●etie
             ,
             declining
             ,
             quantities
             ,
             and
             E●ymologies
             .
          
           
             For
             speedie
             getting
             the
             Greeke
             Primitiues
             ,
             
               Clauis
               linguae
               Graeca●
            
             ,
             made
             much
             more
             plaine
             .
          
           
             For
             entrance
             in
             the
             speedie
             the
             running
             thorough
             the
             best
             Greeke
             Authors
             in
             prose
             ,
             Grammatical
             translations
             of
             
               Isocrates
               ad
               Daemonicum
            
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             〈…〉
             
               Z●nophons
               Cyropaideia
            
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             speedy
             and
             sure
             attaining
             all
             the
             Hebrue
             Radiees
             ,
             are
             preparing
             a
             ●word
             and
             a
             〈◊〉
             thereunto
             like
             〈…〉
             and
             Greeke
             .
          
           
             For
             all
             these
             helpes
             more
             particularly
             ,
             and
             the
             right
             vse
             of
             them
             :
             the
             Grammar
             schoole
             in
             this
             last
             Edition
             .
          
           
             Matter
             of
             charge
             ,
             and
             all
             objections
             there
             answe●●●
             ▪